Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login
to enable hyperlinks.
Overview
| Comment: | Add more libs |
|---|---|
| Timelines: | family | ancestors | descendants | both | trunk |
| Files: | files | file ages | folders |
| SHA1: | d779a931b17fcf56fd95aa8cfa7f7097ef72c720 |
| User & Date: | admin 2015-06-28 20:59:58 |
Context
|
2015-06-28
| ||
| 21:10 | Add more libs check-in: 5362800858 user: admin tags: trunk | |
| 20:59 | Add more libs check-in: d779a931b1 user: admin tags: trunk | |
| 01:22 | Updates to softwareupdate and regproc packages check-in: 4434b6dc01 user: admin tags: trunk | |
Changes
Added aquahig/README.txt.
1 +The Aquahig package 2 + 3 +The aquahig package implements some Mac OS X-specific configurations to selected Tk megawidgets to make them better fit in visually with Mac interface conventions, similar to iTunes and other Mac applications. Currently supported widgets are the BWidgets Tree, the BWidgets ListBox, and Tablelist. 4 + 5 +Using the Aquahig Package 6 + 7 +The aquahig package is invoked by calling package require aquahig. It implements Mac styling for widgets in the form of arrays: 8 + 9 +* aquahig::treeopts: These options add a Mac-style "disclosure triangle" to the BWidget Tree, remove the lines for tree nodes (which is more charactertistic of Windows), and add a light blue background and a blue highlight foreground (similar to iTunes). They also specify the correct font size and spacing. 10 + 11 +* aquahig::listopts: These options add a light blue background and a blue highlight foreground (similar to iTunes) to the BWidget ListBox. They also specify the correct font size and spacing. 12 + 13 +* aquahig::tableopts: These options add a light blue stripe, a blue highlight foreground color, and vertical rules (similar to iTunes) to TableList. 14 + 15 +Usage of the package would look something like this: 16 + 17 +foreach {key value} [array get aquahig::treeopts] { 18 +$w configure -$key $value 19 +} 20 + 21 +Note: the aquahig package depends on the TkImg or TkPNG packages, as the Mac-style disclosure triangles are pngs. To use another image format, such as .gif, you will need to edit the source code accordingly. 22 + 23 +License 24 + 25 +The aquahig package is licensed under the same license as Tcl/Tk itself. See http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/license.html for the current license.
Added aquahig/aquahig.tcl.
1 +#aquahig: provides sane OS X UI configs for BWidget Tree, BWidget ListBox, and Tablelist. (c) 2007 WordTech Communications LLC. License: standard Tcl license, http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/license.html 2 + 3 +package provide aquahig 1.2 4 + 5 +namespace eval aquahig { 6 + 7 + if {![info exists library]} { 8 + variable library [file dirname [info script]] 9 + } 10 + 11 + 12 + 13 +## usage, cf for BWidget Tree: 14 +## foreach {key value} [array get aquahig::treeopts] { 15 +## $w configure -$key $value 16 +## } 17 + 18 +##create Mac-style "disclosure triangle" for tree view 19 + image create bitmap hig_triangleright -file [file join $aquahig::library triangleright.xbm] 20 + image create bitmap hig_triangledown -file [file join $aquahig::library triangledown.xbm] 21 + 22 + 23 + 24 +##configuration options for BWidget Tree 25 + array set [namespace current]::treeopts { 26 + 27 + selectbackground #84a6cb 28 + selectforeground white 29 + deltay 17 30 + showlines 0 31 + crossopenimage hig_triangledown 32 + crosscloseimage hig_triangleright 33 + background #e3e9f1 34 + highlightcolor #e3e9f1 35 + highlightthickness .1 36 + relief flat 37 + selectfill 1 38 + borderwidth 0 39 + 40 + } 41 + 42 +##configuration options for Bwidget ListBox 43 + array set [namespace current]::listopts { 44 + 45 + selectbackground #84a6cb 46 + selectforeground white 47 + deltay 21 48 + background #e3e9f1 49 + highlightcolor #e3e9f1 50 + relief flat 51 + selectfill 1 52 + 53 + } 54 + 55 + ##configuration options for Tablelist 56 + array set [namespace current]::tableopts { 57 + 58 + selectbackground RoyalBlue1 59 + selectforeground white 60 + stretch all 61 + stripebackground #EDF3FE 62 + relief flat 63 + border 0 64 + showseparators yes 65 + takefocus 0 66 + setfocus 1 67 + activestyle none 68 + } 69 + 70 + namespace export * 71 +}
Added aquahig/pkgIndex.tcl.
1 +# Tcl package index file, version 1.1 2 +# This file is generated by the "pkg_mkIndex" command 3 +# and sourced either when an application starts up or 4 +# by a "package unknown" script. It invokes the 5 +# "package ifneeded" command to set up package-related 6 +# information so that packages will be loaded automatically 7 +# in response to "package require" commands. When this 8 +# script is sourced, the variable $dir must contain the 9 +# full path name of this file's directory. 10 + 11 +package ifneeded aquahig 1.2 [list source [file join $dir aquahig.tcl]]
Added aquahig/triangledown.xbm.
1 +#define triangledown_width 13 2 +#define triangledown_height 13 3 +static unsigned char triangledown_bits[] = { 4 + 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0xf8, 0x03, 0xf8, 0x03, 0xf8, 0x03, 5 + 0xf0, 0x01, 0xf0, 0x01, 0xe0, 0x00, 0x60, 0x00, 0x40, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 6 + 0x00, 0x00 };
Added aquahig/triangleright.xbm.
1 +#define triangleright_width 13 2 +#define triangleright_height 13 3 +static unsigned char triangleright_bits[] = { 4 + 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x0c, 0x00, 0x7c, 0x00, 0xfc, 0x00, 5 + 0xfc, 0x03, 0xfc, 0x00, 0x7c, 0x00, 0x1c, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 6 + 0x00, 0x00 };
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ArrowButton.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>ArrowButton</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>ArrowButton</B> 6 + - Button widget with an arrow shape. 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ArrowButton</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TR> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TR> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 26 +</TR> 27 +<TR> 28 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR> 29 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR> 30 +</TR> 31 +<TR> 32 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR> 34 +</TR> 35 +<TR> 36 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TR> 38 +</TR> 39 +<TR> 40 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR> 41 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR> 42 +</TR> 43 +</TABLE></DD> 44 +</DL> 45 +<DL> 46 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 47 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 48 +<TR> 49 +<TD> <A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TR> 50 +<TD> <A HREF="#-arrowbd">-arrowbd</A></TR> 51 +</TR> 52 +<TR> 53 +<TD> <A HREF="#-arrowrelief">-arrowrelief</A></TR> 54 +<TD> <A HREF="#-clean">-clean</A></TR> 55 +</TR> 56 +<TR> 57 +<TD> <A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR> 58 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dir">-dir</A></TR> 59 +</TR> 60 +<TR> 61 +<TD> <A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TR> 62 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR> 63 +</TR> 64 +<TR> 65 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR> 66 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR> 67 +</TR> 68 +<TR> 69 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR> 70 +<TD> <A HREF="#-ipadx">-ipadx</A></TR> 71 +</TR> 72 +<TR> 73 +<TD> <A HREF="#-ipady">-ipady</A></TR> 74 +<TD> <A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR> 75 +</TR> 76 +<TR> 77 +<TD> <A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR> 78 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR> 79 +</TR> 80 +</TABLE></DD> 81 +</DL> 82 +<DL> 83 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 84 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 85 + <I>option</I> 86 +</DD> 87 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 88 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 89 +</DD> 90 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A> 91 +</DD> 92 +</DL> 93 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 94 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 95 +<P> 96 + 97 +ArrowButton can be of two types following <B>type</B> option: 98 +for <B>button</B> type, it is standard button with an arrow drawn on it; 99 +for <B>arrow</B> type, it is an arrow like scrollbar's arrow. 100 +</P> 101 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 102 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 103 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT> 104 +<DD> 105 + 106 +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is pressed 107 +over the ArrowButton. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive 108 +integer, this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the button and until 109 +mouse button 1 is released. 110 +</DD> 111 +</DL> 112 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowbd"><B>-arrowbd</B></A></DT> 113 +<DD> 114 + 115 +When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the border width of the 116 +arrow. Must be 1 or 2. 117 + 118 +</DD> 119 +</DL> 120 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowrelief"><B>-arrowrelief</B></A></DT> 121 +<DD> 122 + 123 +When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the relief of the arrow. 124 +Must be <B>raised</B> or <B>sunken</B>. 125 + 126 +</DD> 127 +</DL> 128 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-clean"><B>-clean</B></A></DT> 129 +<DD> 130 + 131 +Specifies a level of quality, between 0 and 2, for the arrow. 132 +If 0, the arrow is drawn with its maximum width and height. 133 +If 1, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd to have same edges. 134 +If 2, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd and the orthogonal to be (base+1)/2 to 135 +have 'straight' diagonal for edges. 136 +</DD> 137 +</DL> 138 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT> 139 +<DD> 140 + 141 +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton. This command 142 +is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the ArrowButton 143 +window. 144 +</DD> 145 +</DL> 146 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dir"><B>-dir</B></A></DT> 147 +<DD> 148 + 149 +Specifies the direction of the arrow: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B> 150 +or <B>right</B>. 151 +</DD> 152 +</DL> 153 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT> 154 +<DD> 155 + 156 +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is released. 157 +This command is called even if pointer is not over the ArrowButton, and always before 158 +the command specified by <B>command</B> option. 159 +It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and 160 +<B>repeatinterval</B>. 161 +</DD> 162 +</DL> 163 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 164 +<DD> 165 + 166 +Specifies a desired height for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units. 167 +</DD> 168 +</DL> 169 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT> 170 +<DD> 171 + 172 +Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget. 173 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 174 +</DD> 175 +</DL> 176 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT> 177 +<DD> 178 +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>. 179 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 180 +</DD> 181 +</DL> 182 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT> 183 +<DD> 184 +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>. 185 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 186 +</DD> 187 +</DL> 188 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipadx"><B>-ipadx</B></A></DT> 189 +<DD> 190 + 191 +Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the right and left side 192 +of the arrow. The value is in screen units. 193 +</DD> 194 +</DL> 195 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipady"><B>-ipady</B></A></DT> 196 +<DD> 197 + 198 +Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the top and bottom side 199 +of the arrow. The value is in screen units. 200 +</DD> 201 +</DL> 202 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT> 203 +<DD> 204 + 205 +Specifies one of three states for the ArrowButton: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>, 206 +or <B>disabled</B>. 207 +<DL><DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>button</I>:</DT> 208 +<DD>In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the 209 +<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options. The active state is 210 +typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state 211 +the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and 212 +<B>activebackground</B> options. In disabled state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and 213 +<B>background</B> options determine how the ArrowButton is displayed. 214 +</DD> 215 +<DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>:</DT> 216 +<DD>Only colors of arrow change. The background of ArrowButton is always 217 +displayed using <B>troughcolor</B> option. 218 +In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>background</B> option. The active 219 +state is typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state 220 +the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activebackground</B> option. In disabled state 221 +the ArrowButton is displayed with a dark stipple. 222 +</DD> 223 +</DL> 224 +Disabled state means that the ArrowButton 225 +should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate 226 +the widget and will ignore mouse button presses. 227 +</DD> 228 +</DL> 229 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT> 230 +<DD> 231 + 232 +Determines the type of the ArrowButton: <B>button</B> for standard button look, or 233 +<B>arrow</B> scrollbar's arrow look. 234 +</DD> 235 +</DL> 236 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 237 +<DD> 238 + 239 +Specifies a desired width for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units. 240 +</DD> 241 +</DL> 242 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 243 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 244 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 245 + <I>option</I> 246 +</DT><DD> 247 + 248 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 249 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 250 +</DD></DL> 251 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 252 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 253 +</DT><DD> 254 + 255 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 256 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 257 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 258 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 259 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 260 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 261 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 262 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 263 +Read-only options are not be modified. 264 + 265 +</DD></DL> 266 +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A> 267 +</DT><DD> 268 + 269 +If ArrowButton <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the button. 270 +ArrowButton is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and 271 +<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then ArrowButton is redisplayed with 272 +normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B> 273 +are called. 274 +<P><B>invoke</B> is called when ArrowButton has input focus and user press the space bar. 275 +</DD></DL> 276 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/BWidget.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>BWidget</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<IMG SRC="constr.gif" WIDTH="40" HEIGHT="40"> Under construction ...<BR> 5 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 6 +<DD><B>BWidget</B> 7 + - Description text 8 +</DD></DL> 9 +<DL> 10 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT> 11 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#XLFDfont"><B>XLFDfont</B></A> 12 + <I>cmd</I> 13 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 14 +</DD> 15 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#assert"><B>assert</B></A> 16 + <I>exp</I> 17 + ?<I>msg</I>? 18 +</DD> 19 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#badOptionString"><B>badOptionString</B></A> 20 + <I>type</I> 21 + <I>value</I> 22 + <I>list</I> 23 +</DD> 24 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#bindMouseWheel"><B>bindMouseWheel</B></A> 25 + <I>widget</I> 26 +</DD> 27 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#classes"><B>classes</B></A> 28 + <I>class</I> 29 +</DD> 30 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#clonename"><B>clonename</B></A> 31 + <I>menu</I> 32 +</DD> 33 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#focus"><B>focus</B></A> 34 + <I>option</I> 35 + <I>path</I> 36 +</DD> 37 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#get3dcolor"><B>get3dcolor</B></A> 38 + <I>path</I> 39 + <I>bgcolor</I> 40 +</DD> 41 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#getname"><B>getname</B></A> 42 + <I>name</I> 43 +</DD> 44 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#grab"><B>grab</B></A> 45 + <I>option</I> 46 + <I>path</I> 47 +</DD> 48 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#inuse"><B>inuse</B></A> 49 + <I>class</I> 50 +</DD> 51 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#library"><B>library</B></A> 52 + <I>class</I> ?<i>class ...</i>? 53 +</DD> 54 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#lreorder"><B>lreorder</B></A> 55 + <I>list</I> 56 + <I>neworder</I> 57 +</DD> 58 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#parsetext"><B>parsetext</B></A> 59 + <I>text</I> 60 +</DD> 61 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#place"><B>place</B></A> 62 + <I>path</I> 63 + <I>w</I> 64 + <I>h</I> 65 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 66 +</DD> 67 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#write"><B>write</B></A> 68 + <I>filename</I> ?<i>mode</i>? 69 +</DD> 70 +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#wrongNumArgsString"><B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A> 71 + <I>string</I> 72 +</DD> 73 +</DL> 74 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 75 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 76 +<P> 77 +Description text 78 +</P> 79 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 80 +<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR> 81 +<DL><DT><A NAME="XLFDfont">BWidget::<B>XLFDfont</B></A> 82 + <I>cmd</I> 83 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 84 +</DT><DD> 85 +Description text 86 +</DD></DL> 87 +<DL><DT><A NAME="assert">BWidget::<B>assert</B></A> 88 + <I>exp</I> 89 + ?<I>msg</I>? 90 +</DT><DD> 91 +Description text 92 +</DD></DL> 93 +<DL><DT><A NAME="badOptionString">BWidget::<B>badOptionString</B></A> 94 + <I>type</I> 95 + <I>value</I> 96 + <I>list</I> 97 +</DT><DD> 98 +Return a proper error string for a <i>value</i> of <i>type</i> that doesn't 99 +match <i>list</i>. 100 +</DD></DL> 101 + 102 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindMouseWheel">BWidget::<B>bindMouseWheel</B></A> 103 + <I>widget</I> 104 +</DT><DD> 105 + Bind the given <i>widget</i> with the standard mouse wheel bindings. 106 +</DD></DL> 107 + 108 +<DL><DT><A NAME="classes">BWidget::<B>classes</B></A> 109 + <I>class</I> 110 +</DT><DD> 111 + Returns a list of classes needed by the given <i>class</i>. 112 +</DD></DL> 113 + 114 +<DL><DT><A NAME="clonename">BWidget::<B>clonename</B></A> 115 + <I>menu</I> 116 +</DT><DD> 117 +Description text 118 +</DD></DL> 119 +<DL><DT><A NAME="focus">BWidget::<B>focus</B></A> 120 + <I>option</I> 121 + <I>path</I> 122 +</DT><DD> 123 +Description text 124 +</DD></DL> 125 +<DL><DT><A NAME="get3dcolor">BWidget::<B>get3dcolor</B></A> 126 + <I>path</I> 127 + <I>bgcolor</I> 128 +</DT><DD> 129 +Description text 130 +</DD></DL> 131 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getname">BWidget::<B>getname</B></A> 132 + <I>name</I> 133 +</DT><DD> 134 +Description text 135 +</DD></DL> 136 +<DL><DT><A NAME="grab">BWidget::<B>grab</B></A> 137 + <I>option</I> 138 + <I>path</I> 139 +</DT><DD> 140 +Description text 141 +</DD></DL> 142 + 143 +<DL><DT><A NAME="inuse">BWidget::<B>inuse</B></A> 144 + <I>class</I> 145 +</DT><DD> 146 + Returns true or false if the given <i>class</i> is being used by the 147 + current running program. 148 +</DD></DL> 149 + 150 +<DL><DT><A NAME="library">BWidget::<B>library</B></A> 151 + <I>class</I> 152 + ?<i>class ...</i>? 153 +</DT><DD> 154 + Returns a string of code that contains all the libraries needed to 155 + use the widgets given by <i>class</i>. Each class's code and the 156 + code of its dependent classes is appended to the string and returned. 157 + This is mostly useful for saving BWidgets to another project. 158 +</DD></DL> 159 + 160 +<DL><DT><A NAME="lreorder">BWidget::<B>lreorder</B></A> 161 + <I>list</I> 162 + <I>neworder</I> 163 +</DT><DD> 164 +Description text 165 +</DD></DL> 166 +<DL><DT><A NAME="parsetext">BWidget::<B>parsetext</B></A> 167 + <I>text</I> 168 +</DT><DD> 169 +Description text 170 +</DD></DL> 171 +<DL><DT><A NAME="place">BWidget::<B>place</B></A> 172 + <I>path</I> 173 + <I>w</I> 174 + <I>h</I> 175 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 176 +</DT><DD> 177 +Used to position and resize the widget specified by 178 +<I>path</I>. <I>w</I> and <I>h</I> are used to specify the requested 179 +width and height of the <I>path</I> widget for use by <B>wm 180 +geometry</B> (set to 0 to use current values). The placement of the widget relative to other widgets or 181 +the screen is controlled by additional arguments: 182 +<DL> 183 + <DT><B>at</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I></DT> 184 + <DD>Place the widget specified by the <I>path</I> argument at screen 185 + position x,y. See <B>wm geometry</B> for information about window 186 + placement values.</DD> 187 + 188 + <DT><B>center</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT> 189 + <DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget centered against <I>widget</I> or against the 190 + root widget if <I>widget</I> is not given.</DD> 191 + 192 + <DT><B>left</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT> 193 + <DT><B>right</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT> 194 + <DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget either left or right of the 195 + reference widget (or the root widget if <I>widget</I> is not 196 + specified). If the reference widget's position is such that the newly 197 + placed window might be obscured then the opposite side will be tried.</DD> 198 + 199 + <DT><B>above</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT> 200 + <DT><B>below</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT> 201 + <DD>As for left/right above, this option causes the widget to be 202 + placed either above or below the reference widget with the opposite 203 + placement being attempted if the newly placed widget will not be visible. 204 +</DL> 205 +</DL> 206 + 207 +<DL><DT><A NAME="write">BWidget::<B>write</B></A> 208 + <I>filename</I> 209 + ?<i>mode</i>? 210 +</DT><DD> 211 + Writes the currently used set of BWidget class code to the given 212 + <i>filename</i>. All the code necessary to run the BWidgets 213 + currently in use is written to the file. This is mostly useful 214 + for saving BWidget code to another project as a single file instead 215 + of the entire BWidget package. 216 +</DD></DL> 217 + 218 +<DL> 219 +<DT><A NAME="wrongNumArgsString">BWidget::<B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A> 220 + <I>string</I> 221 +</DT> 222 +<DD> 223 + Returns a standard error string for the wrong number of arguments. 224 + <i>string</i> is appended to the standard string. 225 +</DD> 226 +</DL> 227 + 228 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Button.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>Button</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>Button</B> 6 + - Button widget with enhanced options 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Button</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT> 15 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 16 +<TR> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TD> 18 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TD> 19 +</TR> 20 +<TR> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD> 22 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 23 +</TD> 24 +<TR> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TD> 26 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 27 +</TR> 28 +<TR> 29 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD> 30 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD> 31 +</TR> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 35 +</TD> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD> 38 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD> 39 +</TR> 40 +<TR> 41 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD> 42 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD> 43 +</TR> 44 +<TR> 45 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD> 46 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD> 47 +</TR> 48 +<TR> 49 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD> 50 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD> 51 +</TR> 52 +<TR> 53 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD> 54 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD> 55 +</TR> 56 +<TR> 57 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD> 58 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD> 59 +</TR> 60 +<TR> 61 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TD> 62 +</TABLE></DD> 63 +<DT><I>Themed</I></DT> 64 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 65 +<TR> 66 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-compound">-compound</A></TD> 67 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD> 68 +</TR> 69 +<TR> 70 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD> 71 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-style">-style</A></TD> 72 +</TR> 73 +<TR> 74 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD> 75 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD> 76 +</TR> 77 +<TR> 78 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD> 79 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD> 80 +</TR> 81 +<TR> 82 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD> 83 +</TABLE></DD> 84 +</DL> 85 +<DL> 86 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 87 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 88 +<TR> 89 +<TD> <A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TD> 90 +<TD> <A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD> 91 +</TR> 92 +<TR> 93 +<TD> <A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TD> 94 +<TD> <A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TD> 95 +</TR> 96 +<TR> 97 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD> 98 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD> 99 +</TR> 100 +<TR> 101 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD> 102 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD> 103 +</TR> 104 +<TR> 105 +<TD> <A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TD> 106 +<TD> <A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TD> 107 +</TR> 108 +<TR> 109 +<TD> <A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD> 110 +<TD> <A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TD> 111 +</TR> 112 +<TR> 113 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD> 114 +</TABLE></DD> 115 +</DL> 116 +<DL> 117 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 118 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 119 + <I>option</I> 120 +</DD> 121 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 122 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 123 +</DD> 124 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A> 125 +</DD> 126 +</DL> 127 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 128 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 129 +<P> 130 + 131 +Button widget extends the Tk button with new options. 132 +<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options, 133 +a new relief style, callback for <B>arm</B>/<B>disarm</B>, and 134 +<B>repeatdelay</B>/<B>repeatinterval</B> options has been added. 135 +</P> 136 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 137 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 138 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT> 139 +<DD> 140 + 141 +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is pressed over the 142 +Button. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive integer, 143 +this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the Button and until mouse 144 +button 1 is released. 145 +</DD> 146 +</DL> 147 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT> 148 +<DD> 149 + 150 +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button. This command 151 +is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the Button 152 +window. 153 +</DD> 154 +</DL> 155 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT> 156 +<DD> 157 + 158 +Specifies one of three states for the default ring: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>, 159 +or <B>disabled</B>. In active state, the button is drawn with the platform specific 160 +appearance for a default button. In normal state, the button is drawn with the platform 161 +specific appearance for a non-default button, leaving enough space to draw the default 162 +button appearance. The normal and active states will result in buttons of the same size. 163 +In disabled state, the button is drawn with the non-default button appearance without 164 +leaving space for the default appearance. The disabled state may result 165 +in a smaller button than the active state. 166 +</DD> 167 +</DL> 168 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT> 169 +<DD> 170 + 171 +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is released. 172 +This command is called even if pointer is not over the Button, and always before 173 +the command specified by <B>command</B> option. 174 +It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and 175 +<B>repeatinterval</B>. 176 +</DD> 177 +</DL> 178 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 179 +<DD> 180 + 181 +Specifies a desired height for the Button. 182 +If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in 183 +screen units; 184 +for text it is in lines of text. 185 +If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired height is computed 186 +from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR> 187 +Option not available when widget is <I>themed</I>. 188 +</DD> 189 +</DL> 190 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT> 191 +<DD> 192 + 193 +Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget. 194 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 195 +</DD> 196 +</DL> 197 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT> 198 +<DD> 199 +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>. 200 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 201 +</DD> 202 +</DL> 203 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT> 204 +<DD> 205 +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>. 206 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 207 +</DD> 208 +</DL> 209 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT> 210 +<DD> 211 + 212 +Specifies a standard name for the button. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is 213 +found in the resources database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options 214 +are extracted from its value. 215 + 216 +</DD> 217 +</DL> 218 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT> 219 +<DD> 220 + 221 +Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable values are standard values for 222 +button relief (<B>raised</B>, <B>sunken</B>, <B>flat</B>, <B>ridge</B>, <B>solid</B>, and <B>groove</B>) and <B>link</B>, which specifies that button relief is <B>flat</B> when pointer 223 +is outside the button and <B>raised</B> when pointer is inside.<BR> 224 +This option has only the following effect if the widget is <I>themed</I>: 225 +The value <B>link</B> used a style <B>Toolbutton</B> while any other value uses the standard effect. 226 +</DD> 227 +</DL> 228 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT> 229 +<DD> 230 + 231 +Specifies one of three states for the Button: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>, 232 +or <B>disabled</B>. In normal state the Button is displayed using the 233 +<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options. The active state is 234 +typically used when the pointer is over the Button. In active state 235 +the Button is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and 236 +<B>activebackground</B> options. Disabled state means that the Button 237 +should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate 238 +the widget and will ignore mouse button presses. 239 +In this state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and 240 +<B>background</B> options determine how the Button is displayed. 241 +</DD> 242 +</DL> 243 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT> 244 +<DD> 245 + 246 +Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label of the button. 247 +0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character, 248 +and so on. 249 +<BR>The binding <B><Alt-<I>char</I>></B> is automatically set on the toplevel 250 +of the Button to call Button::<B>setfocus</B>. 251 + 252 +</DD> 253 +</DL> 254 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 255 +<DD> 256 + 257 +If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in 258 +screen units; 259 +for text it is in characters. 260 +If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired width is computed 261 +from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. 262 +</DD> 263 +</DL> 264 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 265 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 266 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 267 + <I>option</I> 268 +</DT><DD> 269 + 270 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 271 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 272 +</DD></DL> 273 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 274 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 275 +</DT><DD> 276 + 277 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 278 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 279 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 280 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 281 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 282 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 283 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 284 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 285 +Read-only options are not be modified. 286 + 287 +</DD></DL> 288 +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A> 289 +</DT><DD> 290 + 291 +If Button <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the Button. 292 +Button is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and 293 +<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then Button is redisplayed with 294 +normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B> 295 +are called. 296 +<P><B>invoke</B> is called when Button has input focus and user press the space bar. 297 + 298 +</DD></DL> 299 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 300 +<B><A NAME="wc">BINDINGS</A></B><BR> 301 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Invoke"><I><<Invoke>></I></A> 302 +</DT><DD> 303 + 304 +Invoke the <B>invoke</B> widget command. 305 +</DD></DL> 306 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 307 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ButtonBox.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>ButtonBox</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>ButtonBox</B> 6 + - Set of buttons with horizontal or vertical layout 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ButtonBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="#-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="#-orient">-orient</A></TR> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="#-pady">-pady</A></TR> 26 +</TR> 27 +<TR> 28 +<TD> <A HREF="#-spacing">-spacing</A></TD> 29 +<TD> <A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR> 30 +</TABLE></DD> 31 +</DL> 32 +<DL> 33 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 34 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A> 35 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 36 +</DD> 37 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 38 + <I>option</I> 39 +</DD> 40 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 41 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 42 +</DD> 43 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A> 44 + <I>index</I> 45 +</DD> 46 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A> 47 + <I>index</I> 48 +</DD> 49 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A> 50 + <i>index</i> ?<I>option value...</I>? 51 +</DD> 52 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A> 53 + <I>index</I> 54 +</DD> 55 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A> 56 + <I>index</I> 57 + <I>option</I> 58 +</DD> 59 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A> 60 + <I>index</I> 61 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 62 +</DD> 63 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A> 64 + <I>index</I> 65 +</DD> 66 +</DL> 67 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 68 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 69 +<P> 70 + 71 +ButtonBox layouts Button horizontally or vertically. 72 +Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which 73 +Button it work. This index may be specified in any of the following forms: 74 +<P> 75 +<DL COMPACT> 76 +<DT> 77 +<I>number</I> 78 +<DD> 79 +Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds 80 +to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on. 81 +<DT> 82 +<B>end</B> or <B>last</B> 83 +<DD> 84 +Indicates the last item added. 85 +<DT><B>default</B> 86 +<DD> 87 +Indicates the default Button. 88 + 89 +<DT> 90 +<i>name</i> 91 +<DD> 92 +Indicates the button whose <b>-name</b> option is <i>name</i>. 93 + 94 +<DT> 95 +<i>text</i> 96 +<DD> 97 +Indicates the button whose <b>-text</b> option is <i>text</i>. 98 +</DL> 99 + 100 +</P> 101 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 102 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 103 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-background"><B>-background</B></A></DT> 104 +<DD> 105 + 106 +Specifies a default background color for all added buttons and for the frame.<BR> 107 +For <I>themed</I> wigets, the button color is not set. 108 + 109 +</DD> 110 +</DL> 111 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT> 112 +<DD> 113 + 114 +Specifies the default button of the button box. The value is an integer 115 +referencing the n-th added button, starting from 0. 116 +If this value is -1 (the default), all button wil be drawn with their -default 117 +option set to disabled, and this value can not be changed. <BR>If this value is 118 +not -1, the associated button is drawn with -default option set to active and 119 +the others are drawn with -default option set to normal. The value can be changed 120 +by configure. 121 + 122 +</DD> 123 +</DL> 124 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous (read-only)</B></A></DT> 125 +<DD> 126 + 127 +Specifies wether or not buttons must have the same width for horizontal layout. 128 + 129 +</DD> 130 +</DL> 131 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-orient"><B>-orient (read-only)</B></A></DT> 132 +<DD> 133 + 134 +Specifies the orientation of the button box. If this option is <B>horizontal</B> 135 +(the default), buttons are added from top to bottom. 136 +If this option is <B>vertical</B>, buttons are added from left to right. 137 + 138 +</DD> 139 +</DL> 140 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT> 141 +<DD> 142 + 143 +Specifies a default value for the -padx option of all added buttons.<BR> 144 +Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets. 145 +</DD> 146 +</DL> 147 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-pady"><B>-pady</B></A></DT> 148 +<DD> 149 + 150 +Specifies a default value for the -pady option of all added buttons.<BR> 151 +Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets. 152 + 153 +</DD> 154 +</DL> 155 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-spacing"><B>-spacing</B></A></DT> 156 +<DD> 157 + 158 +Specifies the default spacing between buttons. This value can be changed before each 159 +call to <B>add</B>. 160 + 161 +</DD> 162 +</DL> 163 + 164 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT> 165 +<DD> 166 + 167 +Specifies a state for all the buttons in the button box. Can be any state supported by buttons. 168 + 169 +</DD> 170 +</DL> 171 + 172 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 173 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 174 +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> 175 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 176 +</DT><DD> 177 + 178 +Add a button to the button box. 179 +<P> 180 +See <A HREF="Button.html"><B>Button</B></A> for description of options. 181 +</DD></DL> 182 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 183 + <I>option</I> 184 +</DT><DD> 185 + 186 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 187 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 188 +</DD></DL> 189 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 190 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 191 +</DT><DD> 192 + 193 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 194 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 195 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 196 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 197 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 198 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 199 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 200 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 201 +Read-only options are not be modified. 202 + 203 +</DD></DL> 204 + 205 +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A> 206 + <I>index</I> 207 +</DT><DD> 208 + 209 +Delete the button at <i>index</i> from the button box. 210 + 211 +</DD></DL> 212 + 213 +<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A> 214 + <I>index</I> 215 +</DT><DD> 216 + 217 +Return the numerical index corresponding to the item. 218 + 219 +</DD></DL> 220 + 221 +<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A> 222 + <I>index</I> ?<I>option value...</I>? 223 +</DT><DD> 224 + 225 +Insert a new button into the button box before the given index. 226 + 227 +</DD></DL> 228 + 229 +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A> 230 + <I>index</I> 231 +</DT><DD> 232 + 233 +Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>. 234 + 235 +</DD></DL> 236 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A> 237 + <I>index</I> 238 + <I>option</I> 239 +</DT><DD> 240 + 241 +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item. 242 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command. 243 + 244 +</DD></DL> 245 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A> 246 + <I>index</I> 247 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 248 +</DT><DD> 249 + 250 +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the 251 +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for 252 +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 253 +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated 254 +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified, 255 +returns a list describing the current options for the item. 256 +Read-only options are not be modified. 257 + 258 +</DD></DL> 259 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A> 260 + <I>index</I> 261 +</DT><DD> 262 + 263 +Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>. 264 + 265 +</DD></DL> 266 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ComboBox.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>ComboBox</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>ComboBox</B> 6 + - ComboBox widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ComboBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 17 +<TD> -disabledforeground</TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> -foreground or -fg</TD> 21 +<TD> -state</TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +</TABLE></DD> 24 +</DL> 25 +<DL> 26 +<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT> 27 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 28 +<TR> 29 +<TD> -command</TD> 30 +<TD> -disabledforeground</TD> 31 +</TR> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> -dragenabled</TD> 34 +<TD> -dragendcmd</TD> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> -dragevent</TD> 38 +<TD> -draginitcmd</TD> 39 +</TR> 40 +<TR> 41 +<TD> -dragtype</TD> 42 +<TD> -dropcmd</TD> 43 +</TR> 44 +<TR> 45 +<TD> -dropenabled</TD> 46 +<TD> -dropovercmd</TD> 47 +</TR> 48 +<TR> 49 +<TD> -droptypes</TD> 50 +<TD> -editable</TD> 51 +</TR> 52 +<TR> 53 +<TD> -entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD> 54 +<TD> -entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD> 55 +</TR> 56 +<TR> 57 +<TD> -exportselection</TD> 58 +<TD> -font</TD> 59 +</TR> 60 +<TR> 61 +<TD> -helptext</TD> 62 +<TD> -helptype</TD> 63 +</TR> 64 +<TR> 65 +<TD> -helpvar</TD> 66 +<TD> -highlightbackground</TD> 67 +</TR> 68 +<TR> 69 +<TD> -highlightcolor</TD> 70 +<TD> -highlightthickness</TD> 71 +</TR> 72 +<TR> 73 +<TD> -insertbackground</TD> 74 +<TD> -insertborderwidth</TD> 75 +</TR> 76 +<TR> 77 +<TD> -insertofftime</TD> 78 +<TD> -insertontime</TD> 79 +</TR> 80 +<TR> 81 +<TD> -insertwidth</TD> 82 +<TD> -justify</TD> 83 +</TR> 84 +<TR> 85 +<TD> -selectbackground</TD> 86 +<TD> -selectborderwidth</TD> 87 +</TR> 88 +<TR> 89 +<TD> -selectforeground</TD> 90 +<TD> -show</TD> 91 +</TR> 92 +<TR> 93 +<TD> -state</TD> 94 +<TD> -takefocus</TD> 95 +</TR> 96 +<TR> 97 +<TD> -text</TD> 98 +<TD> -textvariable</TD> 99 +</TR> 100 +<TR> 101 +<TD> -width</TD> 102 +<TD> -xscrollcommand</TD> 103 +</TR> 104 +</TABLE></DD> 105 +</DL> 106 +<DL> 107 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 108 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 109 +<TR> 110 +<TD> <A HREF="#-autocomplete">-autocomplete</A></TD> 111 +<TD> <A HREF="#-autopost">-autopost</A></TD> 112 +</TR> 113 +<TR> 114 +<TD> <A HREF="#-bwlistbox">-bwlistbox</A></TD> 115 +<TD> <A HREF="#-expand">-expand</A></TD> 116 +</TR> 117 +<TR> 118 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD> 119 +<TD> <A HREF="#-hottrack">-hottrack</A></TD> 120 +</TR> 121 +<TR> 122 +<TD> <A HREF="#-images">-images</A></TD> 123 +<TD> <A HREF="#-listboxwidth">-listboxwidth</A></TD> 124 +</TR> 125 +<TR> 126 +<TD> <A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TD> 127 +<TD> <A HREF="#-postcommand">-postcommand</A></TD> 128 +</TR> 129 +<TR> 130 +<TD> <A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TD> 131 +</TR> 132 +</TABLE></DD> 133 +</DL> 134 +<DL> 135 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 136 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A> 137 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 138 +</DD> 139 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 140 + <I>option</I> 141 +</DD> 142 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#clearvalue"><B>clearvalue</B></A> 143 +</DD> 144 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 145 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 146 +</DD> 147 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#get"><B>get</B></A></DD> 148 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getentry"><B>getentry</B></A></DD> 149 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getlistbox"><B>getlistbox</B></A></DD> 150 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A></DD> 151 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#icursor"><B>icursor</B></A> 152 +<I>index</I> 153 +</DD> 154 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#post"><B>post</B></A></DD> 155 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A> 156 + <I>index</I> 157 +</DD> 158 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#unpost"><B>unpost</B></A></DD> 159 +</DL> 160 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 161 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 162 +<P> 163 + 164 +ComboBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by 165 +the <B>values</B> option. The list of possible values can be popped by 166 +pressing the ArrowButton or by clicking in the entry when <B>editable</B> 167 +value of the ComboBox is <B>false</B>.<BR> If <B>editable</B> value of the 168 +ComboBox is <B>true</B> and the entry has the focus, the user can press the 169 +top and bottom arrow keys to modify its value. If the current value exactly 170 +match a value in the list, then the previous (for top arrow key) or then 171 +next (for bottom arrow key) value in the list is displayed. If the current 172 +value match the beginning of a value in the list, then this value is 173 +displayed. If the current value doesnt match anything, then the first 174 +value is displayed. 175 + 176 +</P> 177 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 178 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 179 +<DL> 180 + <DT><A NAME="-autocomplete"><B>-autocomplete</B></A></DT> 181 + <DD> 182 + Specifies whether or not the combobox should attempt to auto-complete 183 + the value in the entry field as the user types. If true, the combobox 184 + will fill in a value that it finds in its value list as the user types 185 + into the entry. 186 + </DD> 187 +</DL> 188 + 189 +<DL> 190 + <DT><A NAME="-autopost"><B>-autopost</B></A></DT> 191 + <DD> 192 + Specifies whether or not the combobox should post the drop down as 193 + the user types. If true, the combobox will post and scroll to the 194 + entry that most closely matches the user entry. 195 + </DD> 196 +</DL> 197 + 198 +<DL> 199 + <DT><A NAME="-bwlistbox"><B>-bwlistbox</B></A></DT> 200 + <DD> 201 + Specifies that the combobox should use a BWidget listbox in its drop 202 + down instead of the standard Tk option. This option is enabled by 203 + default if the <b>-images</b> option is not empty. 204 + </DD> 205 +</DL> 206 + 207 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-expand"><B>-expand</B></A></DT> 208 +<DD> 209 + 210 +Specifies the value expansion behavior for the window. It must be 211 +<B>none</B> (default) or <B>tab</B>. If <B>tab</B> is specified, then 212 +a Tab binding is added to attempt to expand the current value based on 213 +the other values in <B>-values</B>. 214 +</DD> 215 +</DL> 216 + 217 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 218 +<DD> 219 + 220 +Specifies the desired height for the window, in lines. If zero or less, 221 +then the desired height for the window is made just large enough to hold 222 +all the elements in the listbox. 223 +</DD> 224 + 225 +<DL> 226 + <DT><A NAME="-hottrack"><B>-hottrack</B></A></DT> 227 + <DD> 228 + The selection in the drop down listbox will follow the mouse cursor 229 + as it moves. 230 + </DD> 231 +</DL> 232 + 233 +<DL> 234 + <DT><A NAME="-images"><B>-images</B></A></DT> 235 + <DD> 236 + A list of images that correspond to the <b>-values</b> option. Each 237 + image will be drawn next to its value in the drop down. This option 238 + enables the <b>-bwlistbox</b> by default as it is needed to display 239 + images. 240 + </DD> 241 +</DL> 242 + 243 +<DL> 244 + <DT><A NAME="-listboxwidth"><B>-listboxwidth</B></A></DT> 245 + <DD> 246 + Specifies the width of the listbox in the drop down. Defaults to the 247 + same size as the combobox. 248 + </DD> 249 +</DL> 250 + 251 +</DL> 252 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT> 253 +<DD> 254 + 255 +Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the ComboBox by selecting it in the listbox or pressing arrow key. 256 +</DD> 257 +</DL> 258 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-postcommand"><B>-postcommand</B></A></DT> 259 +<DD> 260 + 261 +Specifies a Tcl command called before the listbox of the ComboBox is mapped. 262 +</DD> 263 +</DL> 264 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT> 265 +<DD> 266 + 267 +Specifies the values to display in the listbox of the ComboBox. 268 +</DD> 269 +</DL> 270 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 271 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 272 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A> 273 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 274 +</DT><DD> 275 + 276 +Set bindings on the entry widget. 277 + 278 +</DD></DL> 279 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 280 + <I>option</I> 281 +</DT><DD> 282 + 283 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 284 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 285 + 286 +</DD></DL> 287 + 288 +<DL><DT><A NAME="clearvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>clearvalue</B></A> 289 +</DT><DD> 290 + 291 +Clears the current text of the ComboBox. 292 + 293 +</DD></DL> 294 + 295 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 296 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 297 +</DT><DD> 298 + 299 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no 300 +<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available 301 +options for <I>pathName</I>. If <I>option</I> is specified with no 302 +<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named 303 +<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of 304 +the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more 305 +<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the 306 +given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command 307 +returns an empty string. <I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted 308 +by the creation command. Read-only options are not be modified. 309 + 310 +</DD></DL> 311 + 312 +<DL><DT><A NAME="get"><I>pathName</I> <B>get</B></A> 313 +</DT><DD> 314 + 315 +Returns the current contents of the entry. 316 + 317 +</DD></DL> 318 + 319 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getentry"><I>pathName</I> <B>getentry</B></A> 320 +</DT><DD> 321 + 322 +Returns the path to the contained entry widget. 323 + 324 +</DD></DL> 325 + 326 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getlistbox"><I>pathName</I> <B>getlistbox</B></A> 327 +</DT><DD> 328 + 329 +Returns the path to the listbox in the drop down. 330 + 331 +</DD></DL> 332 + 333 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A> 334 +</DT><DD> 335 + 336 +Returns the index of the current text of the ComboBox in the list of values, 337 +or -1 if it doesn't match any value. 338 + 339 +</DD></DL> 340 + 341 +<DL><DT><A NAME="icursor"><I>pathName</I> <B>icursor</B></A> 342 + <I>index</I> 343 +</DT><DD> 344 + 345 +Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the 346 +character given by <i>index</i>. Returns an empty string. 347 + 348 +</DD></DL> 349 + 350 +<DL><DT><A NAME="post"><I>pathName</I> <B>post</B></A> 351 +</DT><DD> 352 + 353 +Post the drop down. 354 + 355 +</DD></DL> 356 + 357 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A> 358 + <I>index</I> 359 +</DT><DD> 360 + 361 +Set the text of the ComboBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values. 362 +<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms: 363 +<P> 364 +<DL COMPACT> 365 +<DT> 366 +<B>last</B> 367 +<DD> 368 +Specifies the last element of the list of values. 369 +<DT><B>first</B> 370 +<DD> 371 +Specifies the first element of the list of values. 372 +<DT> 373 +<B>next</B> 374 +<DD> 375 +Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list 376 +of values. 377 +<DT><B>previous</B> 378 +<DD> 379 +Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list 380 +of values. 381 +<DT> 382 +@<I>number</I> 383 +<DD> 384 +Specifies the integer index in the list of values. 385 +</DL> 386 + 387 +</DD></DL> 388 + 389 +<DL><DT><A NAME="unpost"><I>pathName</I> <B>unpost</B></A> 390 +</DT><DD> 391 + 392 +Unpost the drop down. 393 + 394 +</DD></DL> 395 + 396 +<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR> 397 + 398 +When Entry of the ComboBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition 399 +to the default Entry bindings: 400 +<UL> 401 +<LI>Page up set the value of the ComboBox to the first value. 402 +<LI>Page down set the value of the ComboBox to the last value. 403 +<LI>Arrow up set the value of the ComboBox to the previous value. 404 +<LI>Arrow down set the value of the ComboBox to the next value. 405 +<LI>If <B>-autopost</B> is enabled, Escape unposts the listbox. 406 +</UL> 407 +If the listbox is not mapped and ComboBox is not editable or disabled, 408 +mouse button 1 on the Entry cause the listbox to popup, as if the user press the ArrowButton. 409 + 410 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Dialog.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>Dialog</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>Dialog</B> 6 + - Dialog abstraction with custom buttons 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Dialog</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I><A HREF="ButtonBox.html">OPTIONS from <B>ButtonBox</B></A></I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 17 +<TD> -homogeneous</TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> -padx</TD> 21 +<TD> -pady</TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> -spacing</TD> 25 +</TABLE></DD> 26 +</DL> 27 +<DL> 28 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 29 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 30 +<TR> 31 +<TD> <A HREF="#-anchor">-anchor</A></TR> 32 +<TD> <A HREF="#-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR> 33 +</TR> 34 +<TR> 35 + 36 +<TD> <A HREF="#-cancel">-cancel</A></TD> 37 +</TR> 38 +<TR> 39 +<TD> <A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR> 40 +<TD> <A HREF="#-geometry">-geometry</A></TR> 41 +</TR> 42 +<TR> 43 +<TD> <A HREF="#-image">-image</A></TR> 44 +<TD> <A HREF="#-modal">-modal</A></TR> 45 +</TR> 46 +<TR> 47 +<TD> <A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR> 48 +<TD> <A HREF="#-place">-place</A></TR> 49 +</TR> 50 +<TR> 51 +<TD> <A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TR> 52 +<TD> <A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR> 53 +</TR> 54 +<TR> 55 +<TD> <A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR> 56 +<TD> <A HREF="#-transient">-transient</A></TR> 57 +</TR> 58 +</TABLE></DD> 59 +</DL> 60 +<DL> 61 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 62 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A> 63 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 64 +</DD> 65 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 66 + <I>option</I> 67 +</DD> 68 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 69 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 70 +</DD> 71 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#draw"><B>draw</B></A> 72 + ?<I>focus</I>? 73 +</DD> 74 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#enddialog"><B>enddialog</B></A> 75 + <I>result</I> 76 +</DD> 77 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A> 78 +</DD> 79 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A> 80 + <I>index</I> 81 +</DD> 82 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A> 83 + <I>index</I> 84 + <I>option</I> 85 +</DD> 86 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A> 87 + <I>index</I> 88 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 89 +</DD> 90 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A> 91 + <I>index</I> 92 +</DD> 93 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#withdraw"><B>withdraw</B></A> 94 +</DD> 95 +</DL> 96 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 97 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 98 +<P> 99 + 100 +Dialog widget enables the user to create a dialog box. 101 +Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which 102 +Button it work. This index is the same specified for equivalent ButtonBox command: 103 +<P> 104 +<DL COMPACT> 105 +<DT> 106 +<I>number</I> 107 +<DD> 108 +Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds 109 +to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on. 110 +<DT> 111 +<B>end</B> or <B>last</B> 112 +<DD> 113 +Indicates the last item added. 114 +<DT><B>default</B> 115 +<DD> 116 +Indicates the default Button. 117 +</DL> 118 + 119 +</P> 120 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 121 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 122 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-anchor"><B>-anchor (read-only)</B></A></DT> 123 +<DD> 124 + 125 +Specifies the anchor point of the ButtonBox. 126 +Must be one of <B>w</B>, <B>e</B>, <B>n</B>, <B>s</B> or <B>c</B>. 127 +If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>top</I> or <I>bottom</I>, 128 +<B>anchor</B> values <I>n</I>, <I>s</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect. 129 +If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>left</I> or <I>right</I>, 130 +<B>anchor</B> values <I>w</I>, <I>e</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect. 131 + 132 +</DD> 133 +</DL> 134 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-bitmap"><B>-bitmap (read-only)</B></A></DT> 135 +<DD> 136 + 137 +Specifies a bitmap to display at the left of the user frame. 138 +<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>. 139 +</DD> 140 +</DL> 141 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-cancel"><B>-cancel</B></A></DT> 142 +<DD> 143 + 144 +Specifies the number of the cancel button of the Dialog. When user presses Esc or the windows close button, 145 +this button is invoked.<BR> 146 +If set to <B>-1</B>, Esc does not invoke anything. 147 +The window close button <I>destroys</I> the dialog in this case and returns <B>-1</B>. 148 +</DD> 149 +</DL> 150 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT> 151 +<DD> 152 + 153 +Specifies the number of the default button of the Dialog. 154 +When user press Return in the Dialog, this button is invoked. 155 +</DD> 156 +</DL> 157 +</DL> 158 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-geometry"><B>-geometry</B></A></DT> 159 +<DD> 160 + 161 +Set the <B>geometry</B> used when method <B>draw</B> is called. 162 +See <B>wm geometry</B> for a parameter description. 163 +</DD> 164 +</DL> 165 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-image"><B>-image (read-only)</B></A></DT> 166 +<DD> 167 + 168 +Specifies an image to display at the left of the user frame. 169 +<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>. 170 +</DD> 171 +</DL> 172 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-modal"><B>-modal</B></A></DT> 173 +<DD> 174 + 175 +This option must be <B>none</B>, <B>local</B> or <B>global</B>. The value of this option 176 +specifies the grab mode of the dialog and how works Dialog::<B>draw</B>. 177 + 178 +</DD> 179 +</DL> 180 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT> 181 +<DD> 182 + 183 +Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is placed relative to its parent. If empty, it is 184 +placed relative to the root window. Also see <B>place</B> option. 185 + 186 +</DD> 187 +</DL> 188 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-place"><B>-place</B></A></DT> 189 +<DD> 190 +Specifies where to draw the Dialog toplevel relative to the dialog's 191 +parent. Must be one of <B>none</B>, <B>center</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>right</B>, 192 +<B>above</B>, <B>below</B>. Default value of <B>place</B> is <I>center</I>. 193 + 194 +</DD> 195 +</DL> 196 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT> 197 +<DD> 198 + 199 +Specifies wether or not to draw a separator between the user frame and the ButtonBox. 200 + 201 +</DD> 202 +</DL> 203 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT> 204 +<DD> 205 + 206 +Specifies where to draw the ButtonBox relative to the user frame. Must be one of 207 +<B>top</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>right</B>. 208 +</DD> 209 +</DL> 210 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT> 211 +<DD> 212 + 213 +Title of the Dialog toplevel. 214 + 215 +</DD> 216 +</DL> 217 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-transient"><B>-transient (read-only)</B></A></DT> 218 +<DD> 219 + 220 +Specifies if the Dialog Toplevel should be a transient window or not. Default 221 +value of <B>transient</B> is <I>true</I>. 222 + 223 +</DD> 224 +</DL> 225 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 226 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 227 +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> 228 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 229 +</DT><DD> 230 + 231 +Add a button to the button box of the dialog box. Default -command option is 232 +<I>Dialog::enddialog $path index</I> where <I>index</I> is number of button added. 233 +</DD></DL> 234 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 235 + <I>option</I> 236 +</DT><DD> 237 + 238 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 239 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 240 +</DD></DL> 241 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 242 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 243 +</DT><DD> 244 + 245 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 246 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 247 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 248 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 249 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 250 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 251 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 252 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 253 +Read-only options are not be modified. 254 + 255 +</DD></DL> 256 +<DL><DT><A NAME="draw"><I>pathName</I> <B>draw</B></A> 257 + ?<I>focus</I>? 258 +</DT><DD> 259 + 260 +This command draw the Dialog, and set grab to it following <B>modal</B> option. 261 +If <B>modal</B> option is set to <I>none</I>, the command returns immediatly 262 +an empty string. In all other case, the command returns when Dialog::<B>enddialog</B> 263 +is called or when Dialog is destroyed. 264 +The return value is the result argument of Dialog::<B>enddialog</B> or -1 if it is destroyed. 265 +<P> 266 +By default, the focus is set to the default button referenced by <B>default</B> option, 267 +or to the toplevel of Dialog if no default button has been set. 268 +If <I>focus</I> is present, it must be a pathname, or an index to a button. 269 +Initial focus is set on this pathname or corresponding button. 270 + 271 +</DD></DL> 272 +<DL><DT><A NAME="enddialog"><I>pathName</I> <B>enddialog</B></A> 273 + <I>result</I> 274 +</DT><DD> 275 + 276 +This command is typically called within a command of a button to make Dialog::<B>draw</B> 277 +return. 278 + 279 +</DD></DL> 280 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 281 +</DT><DD> 282 + 283 +Returns the pathname of the user window. 284 +</DD></DL> 285 +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A> 286 + <I>index</I> 287 +</DT><DD> 288 + 289 +Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>. 290 + 291 +</DD></DL> 292 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A> 293 + <I>index</I> 294 + <I>option</I> 295 +</DT><DD> 296 + 297 +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item. 298 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command. 299 + 300 +</DD></DL> 301 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A> 302 + <I>index</I> 303 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 304 +</DT><DD> 305 + 306 +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the 307 +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for 308 +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 309 +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated 310 +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified, 311 +returns a list describing the current options for the item. 312 +Read-only options are not be modified. 313 + 314 +</DD></DL> 315 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A> 316 + <I>index</I> 317 +</DT><DD> 318 + 319 +Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>. 320 + 321 +</DD></DL> 322 +<DL><DT><A NAME="withdraw"><I>pathName</I> <B>withdraw</B></A> 323 +</DT><DD> 324 + 325 +Call this command to hide the dialog box. 326 + 327 +</DD></DL> 328 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/DragSite.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>DragSite</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>DragSite</B> 6 + - Commands set for Drag facilities 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT> 10 +<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A> 11 + <I>class</I> 12 + <I>type</I> 13 + <I>event</I> 14 +</DD> 15 +<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A> 16 + <I>path</I> 17 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 18 +</DD> 19 +<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#setdrag"><B>setdrag</B></A> 20 + <I>path</I> 21 + <I>subpath</I> 22 + <I>initcmd</I> 23 + <I>endcmd</I> 24 + ?<I>force</I>? 25 +</DD> 26 +</DL> 27 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 28 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 29 +<P> 30 + 31 +Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drag site. 32 + 33 + 34 + 35 +</P> 36 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 37 +<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR> 38 +<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DragSite::<B>include</B></A> 39 + <I>class</I> 40 + <I>type</I> 41 + <I>event</I> 42 +</DT><DD> 43 + 44 +This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drag site into 45 +BWidget resources definition. 46 +It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>: <I>-dragevent</I>, initialized to 47 +<I>event</I>, <I>-draginitcmd</I> and <I>-dragendcmd</I>, initialized to empty string, 48 +and two new options: 49 +<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1> 50 +<TR><TD><I>-dragenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drag is active (initialized to 0) 51 +<TR><TD><I>-dragtype</I><TD>Default or alternate dragged data type (initialized to <I>type</I>) 52 +</TABLE> 53 + 54 +</DD></DL> 55 +<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DragSite::<B>register</B></A> 56 + <I>path</I> 57 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 58 +</DT><DD> 59 + 60 +This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drag site. Options are: 61 + 62 +<P> 63 +<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT> 64 +<DD> 65 + 66 +Command called when drag terminates (ie when user release drag icon). 67 +This command is called with the following arguments: 68 +<UL> 69 +<LI>the pathname of the drag source (the widget itself), 70 +<LI>the pathname of the drop target, 71 +<LI>the operation, 72 +<LI>the type of the dragged data, 73 +<LI>the dragged data, 74 +<LI>result of the drop (result of the call to <B>-dropcmd</B> of the target), 75 +</UL> 76 +If the drop does not occurs, the target and the operation are empty string and the result 77 +is 0. 78 + 79 +</DD> 80 +</DL> 81 +<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT> 82 +<DD> 83 + 84 +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag. 85 +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>. 86 + 87 +</DD> 88 +</DL> 89 +<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT> 90 +<DD> 91 + 92 +Command called when drag initiates. When the event of option <B>dragevent</B> occurs on 93 +<I>path</I>, this command is called with the following arguments: 94 +<UL> 95 +<LI>pathname of the drag source (<I>path</I>), 96 +<LI>root x-coordinate of pointer, 97 +<LI>root y-coordinate of pointer, 98 +<LI>a toplevel created to represent dragged data. When returning, if it 99 +has no children, a bitmap is automatically displayed. 100 +</UL> 101 +If the command returns an empty string, then the drag will be 102 +suppressed. Otherwise the command must return a list containing three 103 +elements: 104 +<UL> 105 +<LI>the type of the data, 106 +<LI>the list of acceptable basic operations (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> and <B>link</B>) 107 +<LI>and the data. 108 +</UL> 109 +Note that even if <B>copy</B> does not appear in the list of basic 110 +operation, it is considered as an acceptable operation, since 111 +<B>copy</B> semantic does not modify the drag source. 112 + 113 +</DD> 114 +</DL> 115 +</DD></DL> 116 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrag">DragSite::<B>setdrag</B></A> 117 + <I>path</I> 118 + <I>subpath</I> 119 + <I>initcmd</I> 120 + <I>endcmd</I> 121 + ?<I>force</I>? 122 +</DT><DD> 123 + 124 +This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or 125 +configuration. 126 +<UL> 127 +<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget, 128 +<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs, 129 +<LI><I>initcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-init</I> event, 130 +<LI><I>endcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-end</I> event, 131 +<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value has 132 +changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation). 133 +</UL> 134 +<B>setdrag</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dragenabled</B> and 135 +<B>dragevent</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and 136 +<I>initcmd</I> and <I>endcmd</I> arguments. <B>draginitcmd</B> and <B>dragendcmd</B> are not 137 +taken from options of widget because they are considered as user command, called by 138 +BWidget implementation of <I>drag-init</I> and <I>drag-end</I> events. 139 + 140 +</DD></DL> 141 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/DropSite.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>DropSite</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>DropSite</B> 6 + - Commands set for Drop facilities 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT> 10 +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A> 11 + <I>class</I> 12 + <I>types</I> 13 +</DD> 14 +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A> 15 + <I>path</I> 16 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 17 +</DD> 18 +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setcursor"><B>setcursor</B></A> 19 + <I>cursor</I> 20 +</DD> 21 +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setdrop"><B>setdrop</B></A> 22 + <I>path</I> 23 + <I>subpath</I> 24 + <I>dropover</I> 25 + <I>drop</I> 26 + ?<I>force</I>? 27 +</DD> 28 +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setoperation"><B>setoperation</B></A> 29 + <I>op</I> 30 +</DD> 31 +</DL> 32 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 33 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 34 +<P> 35 + 36 +Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drop site. 37 +A drop site is composed of the type of object that can be dropped and associated operation, 38 +a command called when drop occurs, and a command when an object is dragged over the widget. 39 +A drop site must have at least one type of acceptable object and a drop command. 40 + 41 +</P> 42 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 43 +<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR> 44 +<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DropSite::<B>include</B></A> 45 + <I>class</I> 46 + <I>types</I> 47 +</DT><DD> 48 + 49 +This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drop site into 50 +BWidget resources definition. 51 +It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>, <I>-dropovercmd</I> and <I>-dropcmd</I>, 52 +initialized to empty string, and <I>-droptypes</I>, initialized to <I>types</I>, 53 +and one new option: 54 +<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1> 55 +<TR><TD><I>-dropenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drop is active (initialized to 0) 56 +</TABLE> 57 + 58 +</DD></DL> 59 +<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DropSite::<B>register</B></A> 60 + <I>path</I> 61 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 62 +</DT><DD> 63 + 64 +This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drop site. Options are: 65 + 66 +<P> 67 +<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT> 68 +<DD> 69 + 70 +This command is called when user release the drag icon over a valid 71 +drop target widget. Arguments passed to the command are: 72 + 73 +<UL> 74 +<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself), 75 +<LI>pathname of the drag source, 76 +<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer, 77 +<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer, 78 +<LI>operation, 79 +<LI>type of the dragged data, 80 +<LI>dragged data. 81 +</UL> 82 + 83 +Its return values is passed as a result to the <B>-dragendcmd</B> 84 +command of the drag source widget. 85 + 86 +</DD> 87 +</DL> 88 +<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT> 89 +<DD> 90 + 91 +This command can be used to provide a dynamic drag while <I>drag-over</I> events. 92 +While a drag occurs, events <Enter>, <Motion> and <Leave> are catched. 93 +Arguments passed to the command are: 94 +<UL> 95 +<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself), 96 +<LI>pathname of the drag source, 97 +<LI>event over the drop target: <I>enter</I>, <I>motion</I> or <I>leave</I>, 98 +<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer, 99 +<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer, 100 +<LI>operation, 101 +<LI>type of the dragged data, 102 +<LI>dragged data. 103 +</UL> 104 +Command must the new status of the drag: 105 +<UL> 106 +<LI>0 if widget refuse this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event. 107 +<LI>1 if widget accept this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event. 108 +<LI>2 if widget refuse this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate. 109 +<LI>3 if widget accept this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate. 110 + 111 +</UL> 112 +Here is a list of events and associated actions on a DropSite widget. This example 113 +assumes that dragged data type is valid for the drop target. 114 +<B>status</B> is the status of the drag on a DropSite. Its value is: 115 +<BR><BR> 116 + 117 +<TABLE BORDER CELLSPACING=1 CELLPADDING=4> 118 +<TR> 119 +<TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Event</TD> 120 +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Old status</TD> 121 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Action</TD> 122 +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">New status</TD> 123 +</TR> 124 +<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2> 125 +<FONT SIZE=2><Enter></FONT></TD> 126 +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2> 127 +<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD> 128 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> 129 +<FONT SIZE=2>if DropSite has <B>dropovercmd</B>, call it with <I>enter</I></FONT></TD> 130 +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP"> 131 +<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD> 132 +</TR> 133 +<TR><TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> 134 +<FONT SIZE=2>else</FONT></TD> 135 +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP"> 136 +<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD> 137 +</TR> 138 +<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2> 139 +<FONT SIZE=2><Motion></FONT></TD> 140 +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP"> 141 +<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD> 142 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> </TD> 143 +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP"> 144 +<FONT SIZE=2>unchanged</FONT></TD> 145 +</TR> 146 +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP"> 147 +<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD> 148 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> 149 +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>motion</I></FONT></TD> 150 +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP"> 151 +<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD> 152 +</TR> 153 +<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2> 154 +<FONT SIZE=2><Leave></FONT> </TD> 155 +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP"> 156 +<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD> 157 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> </TD> 158 +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP"> 159 +<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD> 160 +</TR> 161 +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP"> 162 +<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD> 163 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> 164 +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I></FONT></TD> 165 +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP"> 166 +<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD> 167 +</TR> 168 +<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4> 169 +<FONT SIZE=2><Drop></FONT></TD> 170 +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP"> 171 +<FONT SIZE=2>0</FONT></TD> 172 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> 173 +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD> 174 +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4> 175 +<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD> 176 +</TR> 177 +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP"> 178 +<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD> 179 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> 180 +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD> 181 +</TR> 182 +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP"> 183 +<FONT SIZE=2>2</FONT></TD> 184 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> 185 +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD> 186 +</TR> 187 +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP"> 188 +<FONT SIZE=2>3</FONT></TD> 189 +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP"> 190 +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD> 191 +</TR> 192 +</TABLE> 193 +<BR> 194 + 195 +</DD> 196 +</DL> 197 +<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT> 198 +<DD> 199 + 200 +Specifies a list {<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I> ?<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I>? ...} of acceptable 201 +types and associated operations for the drop target. 202 +For each type, <I>oplist</I> is a list 203 +{<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I> ?<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I>? ...} describing operations and 204 +modifier keys for these operations. 205 +<I>descops</I> describe an operation. It can be a predefined operations (<B>copy</B>, 206 +<B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) or a new user defined operation, of the form {<I>subop</I> 207 +<B>baseop</B> ?<I>bitmap</I>?}. 208 +<I>subop</I> is the name given to the sub operation, <I>baseop</I> is the name of the 209 +base operation (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) and <I>bitmap</I> is a bitmap 210 +to display for the operation. 211 +<BR>If <I>bitmap</I> is empty, the default bitmap of the base operation is used for the 212 +sub operation. 213 +<BR><I>subop</I> can be a base operation, in order to change the bitmap of a base operation. 214 +In this case, <I>baseop</I> must be empty or equal to <I>subop</I>. 215 +<BR><I>mod</I> is the modifer key for the operation. It can be: 216 +<UL> 217 +<LI><B>none</B> to specify that no modifier key is pressed. This modifier can only be used 218 +with a sub operation named <B>default</B> (and vice versa), which has the behaviour of not 219 +display any bitmap operation. For all type, if the modifier <B>none</B> is not given, it is 220 +automatically associated to the <B>default</B> sub operation of a <B>copy</B> base operation. 221 +<LI><B>program</B> to specifies a sub operation accessible only by <B>DropSite::setoperation</B>. 222 +<LI>A list combining <B>shift</B>, <B>control</B> and <B>alt</B>, which means their 223 +corresponding key. 224 +</UL> 225 + 226 +</DD> 227 +</DL> 228 +</DD></DL> 229 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setcursor">DropSite::<B>setcursor</B></A> 230 + <I>cursor</I> 231 +</DT><DD> 232 + 233 +This command can be used within the script <B>dragovercmd</B>. It is usefull to provide 234 +visual effect about the state of the drag. 235 +</DD></DL> 236 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrop">DropSite::<B>setdrop</B></A> 237 + <I>path</I> 238 + <I>subpath</I> 239 + <I>dropover</I> 240 + <I>drop</I> 241 + ?<I>force</I>? 242 +</DT><DD> 243 + 244 +This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or 245 +configuration. 246 +<UL> 247 +<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget, 248 +<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs, 249 +<LI><I>dropover</I> is a command for <I>drag-over</I> event, 250 +<LI><I>drop</I> is a command for <I>drop</I> event, 251 +<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value 252 +has changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation). 253 +</UL> 254 +<B>setdrop</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dropenabled</B> and 255 +<B>droptypes</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and 256 +<I>dropover</I> and <I>drop</I> arguments. <B>dropovercmd</B> and <B>dropcmd</B> are not 257 +taken from options of widget because they are considered as user command, called by 258 +BWidget implementation of <I>drag-over</I> and <I>drop</I> events. 259 + 260 +</DD></DL> 261 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setoperation">DropSite::<B>setoperation</B></A> 262 + <I>op</I> 263 +</DT><DD> 264 +Description text 265 +</DD></DL> 266 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/DynamicHelp.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>DynamicHelp</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>DynamicHelp</B> 6 + - Provide help to Tk widget or BWidget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT> 10 +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A> 11 +<i>widget</i> ?<I>option value ...</I>? 12 +</DD> 13 +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 14 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 15 +</DD> 16 +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A> 17 +<i>widget</i> 18 +</DD> 19 +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A> 20 + <I>class</I> 21 + <I>type</I> 22 +</DD> 23 +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A> 24 + <I>path</I> 25 + <I>type</I> 26 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 27 +</DD> 28 +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#sethelp"><B>sethelp</B></A> 29 + <I>path</I> 30 + <I>subpath</I> 31 + ?<I>force</I>? 32 +</DD> 33 +</DL> 34 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 35 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 36 +<P> 37 +Description text 38 +</P> 39 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 40 +<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR> 41 + 42 +<DL><DT><A NAME="add">DynamicHelp::<B>add</B></A> 43 + ?<I>option value ...</I>? 44 +</DT><DD> 45 +<p> 46 +This command adds dynamic help to the given <i>widget</i>. 47 +</p> 48 + <DL><DT><A NAME="add-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT> 49 + <DD> 50 + If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help 51 + text to display. The command must return a string to display. 52 + If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed. 53 + </DD> 54 + </DL> 55 + 56 + <DL><DT><A NAME="add-index"><B>-index</B></A></DT> 57 + <DD> 58 + If specified, refers to a menu index to bind the help to instead of 59 + a widget. If <b>-type</b> is not menu, this option is ignored. 60 + </DD> 61 + </DL> 62 + 63 + <DL><DT><A NAME="add-item"><B>-item</B></A></DT> 64 + <DD> 65 + If specified, refers to an item or tag on a canvas widget or to a tag 66 + in a text widget to bind the help to instead of to a widget. 67 + </DD> 68 + </DL> 69 + 70 + <DL><DT><A NAME="add-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT> 71 + <DD> 72 + Specifies the type of help. Can be: 73 + <b>balloon</b>, <b>variable</b> or <b>menu</b>. 74 + Default is <b>balloon</b>. 75 + </DD> 76 + </DL> 77 + 78 + <DL><DT><A NAME="add-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT> 79 + <DD> 80 + The text to be displayed as help. 81 + </DD> 82 + </DL> 83 + 84 + <DL><DT><A NAME="add-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT> 85 + <DD> 86 + Specifies a variable name to which the help string will be 87 + written. Some other widget (e.g., a status bar) is 88 + responsible for displaying this variable. 89 + </DD> 90 + </DL> 91 + 92 + <p> 93 + Creating dynamic help for a menu is a two-step process. The menu 94 + itself must first be added and then each menu entry must be added 95 + separately. Here is a brief example. 96 + </p> 97 + 98 + <TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%"> 99 + <TR><TD><PRE> 100 + <FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT> 101 + menu .m -type menubar 102 + <FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT> 103 + <FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT> 104 + . configure -menu .m 105 + .m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file 106 + menu .m.file 107 + .m.file add command -label "Open..." 108 + .m.file add command -label "Quit" 109 + <FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT> 110 + label .l -textvariable varinfo 111 + <FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT> 112 + DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -variable varinfo 113 + <FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT> 114 + DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 0 -text "Detach menu" 115 + DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 1 -text "Open a file" 116 + DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 2 -text "Exit demo" 117 + </PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER> 118 + 119 +</DL> 120 + 121 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure">DynamicHelp::<B>configure</B></A> 122 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 123 +</DT><DD> 124 +This command configure the ballon help. 125 +<P> 126 +<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-borderwidth"><B>-borderwidth</B></A></DT> 127 +<DD> 128 +Width of the black border around the balloon. 129 +</DD> 130 +</DL> 131 +<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-delay"><B>-delay</B></A></DT> 132 +<DD> 133 +Define the delay in millisecond of mouse inactivity before displaying 134 +the balloon. 135 +</DD> 136 +</DL> 137 +<dl> 138 + <dt><a name="DynamicHelp-state"><b>-state</b></a></dt> 139 + <dd> 140 + Specifies one of two states for help balloons: <b>normal</b> and 141 + <b>disabled</b>. 142 + </dd> 143 + <dd> 144 + If <b>state</b> is <b>disabled</b>, help balloons will not be displayed 145 + for any registered widget. 146 + </dd> 147 +</dl> 148 +<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-topbackground"><B>-topbackground</B></A></DT> 149 +<DD> 150 +The background color of the toplevel window created for a balloon. 151 +</DD> 152 +</DL> 153 +<BR>Other standard options are: 154 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 155 +<TR> 156 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 157 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR> 158 +</TR> 159 +<TR> 160 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 161 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR> 162 +</TR> 163 +<TR> 164 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD> 165 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR> 166 +</TR> 167 +</TABLE></DD> 168 +</DD></DL> 169 + 170 +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete">DynamicHelp::<B>delete</B></A> 171 + <I>widget</I> 172 +</DT><DD> 173 + Delete all dynamic help for the given <i>widget</i>. 174 +</DD></DL> 175 + 176 +<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DynamicHelp::<B>include</B></A> 177 + <I>class</I> 178 + <I>type</I> 179 +</DT><DD> 180 +Description text 181 +</DD></DL> 182 +<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DynamicHelp::<B>register</B></A> 183 + <I>path</I> 184 + <I>type</I> 185 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 186 +</DT><DD> 187 +<p> 188 +<b>Its use is deprecated. Use <i>DynamicHelp::add</i> instead.</b> 189 +</p> 190 + 191 +Register a help text to the widget <I>path</I>. 192 +<I>type</I> determines the type of the help or the type of the widget. 193 +Depending on <I>type</I>, other options must be provided. 194 +<BR> 195 +<TABLE CELLSPACING=5 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 196 +<TR><TD><B> type </B></TD><TD><B> options </B></TD></TR> 197 +<TR><TD><B><I> balloon </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? text </I></TD></TR> 198 +<TR><TD><B><I> variable </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? varName text </I></TD></TR> 199 +<TR><TD><B><I> menu </I></B></TD><TD><I> varName </I></TD></TR> 200 +<TR><TD><B><I> menuentry </I></B></TD><TD><I> index text </I></TD></TR> 201 +</TABLE> 202 +<BR>If one of the option is missing or is empty, help is removed for this widget. 203 +<p> 204 + 205 +If <i>tagOrItem</i> is specified, then <i>path</i> is a canvas or a text. In 206 +case of a canvas, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the name of a tag or item on the canvas 207 +to which the help will be bound. In case of a text, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the 208 +name of a tag on the text to which the help will be bound. 209 + 210 +</p> 211 +For type other than <I>balloon</I>, <I>varName</I> is typically a variable 212 +linked to a label. 213 +<BR>For menu, balloon type help is not available. To declare a help for menu, 214 +you first declare the menu, and then entries of this menu. 215 +<BR>For example: 216 +<BR><BR> 217 +<CENTER> 218 +<TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%"> 219 +<TR><TD><PRE> 220 + <FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT> 221 +menu .m -type menubar 222 +<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT> 223 +<FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT> 224 +. configure -menu .m 225 +.m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file 226 +menu .m.file 227 +.m.file add command -label "Open..." 228 +.m.file add command -label "Quit" 229 +<FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT> 230 +label .l -textvariable varinfo 231 +<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT> 232 +DynamicHelp::register .m.file menu varinfo 233 +<FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT> 234 +DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 0 "Detach menu" 235 +DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 1 "Open a file" 236 +DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 2 "Exit demo" 237 +</PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER> 238 +<BR> 239 +<BR>Notice that if popup menu is owned by a menubar, you must associate first the menubar 240 +to its toplevel. In this case, when you create a menu popup, its clone window is also 241 +created, and DynamicHelp::register detects the exitence of the clone window and maps 242 +events to it. 243 +</DD></DL> 244 +<DL><DT><A NAME="sethelp">DynamicHelp::<B>sethelp</B></A> 245 + <I>path</I> 246 + <I>subpath</I> 247 + ?<I>force</I>? 248 +</DT><DD> 249 +Description text 250 +</DD></DL> 251 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Entry.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>Entry</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>Entry</B> 6 + - Entry widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Entry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT> 15 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 16 +<TR> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 18 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 19 +</TR> 20 +<TR> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledbackground">-disabledbackground</A></TD> 22 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD> 23 +</TR> 24 +<TR> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD> 26 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD> 27 +</TR> 28 +<TR> 29 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 30 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD> 31 +</TR> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-insertbackground">-insertbackground</A></TD> 38 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-insertborderwidth">-insertborderwidth</A></TD> 39 +</TR> 40 +<TR> 41 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD> 42 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD> 43 +</TR> 44 +<TR> 45 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD> 46 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD> 47 +</TR> 48 +<TR> 49 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD> 50 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD> 51 +</TR> 52 +<TR> 53 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-selectborderwidth">-selectborderwidth</A></TD> 54 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD> 55 +</TR> 56 +<TR> 57 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD> 58 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD> 59 +</TR> 60 +<TR> 61 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD> 62 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD> 63 +</TABLE></DD> 64 +</DL> 65 +<DL> 66 +<DT><I>Themed</I></DT> 67 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 68 +<TR> 69 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD> 70 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD> 71 +</TR> 72 +<TR> 73 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD> 74 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD> 75 +</TR> 76 +<TR> 77 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD> 78 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD> 79 +</TR> 80 +<TR> 81 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD> 82 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD> 83 +</TR> 84 +<TR> 85 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD> 86 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD> 87 +</TABLE></DD> 88 +</DL> 89 +<DL> 90 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 91 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 92 +<TR> 93 +<TD> <A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD> 94 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD> 95 +</TR> 96 +<TR> 97 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD> 98 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD> 99 +</TR> 100 +<TR> 101 +<TD> <A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD> 102 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD> 103 +</TR> 104 +<TR> 105 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD> 106 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD> 107 +</TR> 108 +<TR> 109 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD> 110 +<TD> <A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD> 111 +</TR> 112 +<TR> 113 +<TD> <A HREF="#-editable">-editable</A></TD> 114 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD> 115 +</TR> 116 +<TR> 117 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD> 118 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD> 119 +</TR> 120 +<TR> 121 +<TD> <A HREF="#-show">-show</A></TD> 122 +<TD> <A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD> 123 +</TR> 124 +<TR> 125 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD> 126 +</TABLE></DD> 127 +</DL> 128 +<DL> 129 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 130 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 131 + <I>option</I> 132 +</DD> 133 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 134 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 135 +</DD> 136 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A> 137 +</DD> 138 +</DL> 139 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 140 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 141 +<P> 142 + 143 +The <B>Entry</B> widget extends the default Tk entry. Options have been added to provide 144 +visual effect depending on the state of the Entry, 145 +<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options, 146 +and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag</A> and 147 +<A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>. 148 +Entry behaves much like a Label, with <B>text</B> option to set its contents. 149 +<BR>Tk entry command can also be used on Entry widget. 150 + 151 +</P> 152 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 153 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 154 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT> 155 +<DD> 156 + 157 +Specifies a command when user press <Return> in the Entry. 158 +</DD> 159 +</DL> 160 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT> 161 +<DD> 162 +A boolean specifying if drag is enabled. 163 +</DD> 164 +</DL> 165 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT> 166 +<DD> 167 + 168 +Specifies a command to be called when drag ended. 169 +<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the 170 +option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 171 + 172 +<BR>If <B>dragendcmd</B> is empty, the internal <I>dragend</I> command updates the entry 173 +following the operation (<B>move</B> or <B>copy</B>) and the dragged data 174 +(whole or selected part of the entry). 175 + 176 +</DD> 177 +</DL> 178 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT> 179 +<DD> 180 + 181 +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag. 182 +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>. 183 + 184 +</DD> 185 +</DL> 186 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT> 187 +<DD> 188 + 189 +Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget. 190 +<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the 191 +option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 192 + 193 +<BR>if <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the command refuse the drag if entry is empty or if 194 +portion of text is selected and event doesn't occur above the selection. In all other cases, 195 +the command returns: 196 +<UL> 197 +<LI>as the data type, the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TEXT</I> if empty, 198 +<LI>as the operations, <I>{copy move}</I> if <B>state</B> is normal and <B>editable</B> 199 +is true, or <I>{copy}</I> only in other cases, 200 +<LI>as the data, the whole content or the selected portion of the entry. 201 +</UL> 202 + 203 +</DD> 204 +</DL> 205 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT> 206 +<DD> 207 + 208 +Specifies an alternate type of dragged object. 209 + 210 +</DD> 211 +</DL> 212 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT> 213 +<DD> 214 + 215 +Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling 216 +and extract current position. 217 +<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments: 218 +<UL> 219 +<LI>the pathname of the Entry, 220 +<LI>the pathname of the drag source, 221 +<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor, 222 +<LI>the current operation, 223 +<LI>the data type, 224 +<LI>the data. 225 +</UL> 226 +and must return a value conforming to <B>dropcmd</B> option described in 227 +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 228 +If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the wrapper updates the entry following the type of data: 229 +<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1> 230 +<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD> 231 +<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Entry</TD> 232 +<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD> 233 +<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Entry</TD> 234 +<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD> 235 +<TD>reconfigure the Entry to display the associated string.</TD> 236 +</TABLE></DL> 237 +and returns 1. 238 + 239 +</DD> 240 +</DL> 241 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT> 242 +<DD> 243 +A boolean specifying if drop is enabled. 244 +</DD> 245 +</DL> 246 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT> 247 +<DD> 248 + 249 +Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling 250 +and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>. 251 +<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, the wrapper accepts the drop if <B>editable</b> option is 252 +true and <B>state</B> option is normal. 253 +<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments: 254 +<UL> 255 +<LI>the pathname of the Entry, 256 +<LI>the pathname of the drag source, 257 +<LI>the event, 258 +<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor, 259 +<LI>the current operation, 260 +<LI>the data type, 261 +<LI>the data. 262 +</UL> 263 +and must return a value conforming to <B>dropovercmd</B> option described in 264 +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 265 + 266 +</DD> 267 +</DL> 268 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT> 269 +<DD> 270 + 271 +Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation. 272 +See option <B>droptypes</B> of 273 +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 274 +for more infromation. 275 + 276 +Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I> and <I>TEXT</I>, 277 +all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations. 278 + 279 +</DD> 280 +</DL> 281 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-editable"><B>-editable</B></A></DT> 282 +<DD> 283 + 284 +Specifies whether the Entry is editable by the user. Equivalent to the <B>state</B> option 285 +of the Tk entry widget. 286 +</DD> 287 +</DL> 288 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT> 289 +<DD> 290 + 291 +Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget. 292 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 293 +</DD> 294 +</DL> 295 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT> 296 +<DD> 297 +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>. 298 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 299 +</DD> 300 +</DL> 301 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT> 302 +<DD> 303 +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>. 304 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 305 +</DD> 306 +</DL> 307 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-show"><B>-show</B></A></DT> 308 +<DD> 309 + 310 +If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry are not displayed in the 311 +window. Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as the first character 312 +in the value of this option, such as ``*''. This is useful, for example, if the entry is to 313 +be used to enter a password. If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the 314 +information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents of the entry. 315 +</DD> 316 +</DL> 317 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT> 318 +<DD> 319 + 320 +Specifies one of two states for the Entry: <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>. 321 +In normal state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option. 322 +In disabled state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B> 323 +option. If the entry is disabled then the value may not be changed by user input 324 +and no insertion cursor will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget. 325 +Disabled state is the same as not editable with visual effect. 326 +</DD> 327 +</DL> 328 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 329 +<DD> 330 + 331 +Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window, in average-size 332 +characters of the widget's font. If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks 333 +a size just large enough to hold its current text. 334 +</DD> 335 +</DL> 336 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 337 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 338 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 339 + <I>option</I> 340 +</DT><DD> 341 + 342 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 343 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 344 +</DD></DL> 345 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 346 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 347 +</DT><DD> 348 + 349 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 350 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 351 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 352 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 353 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 354 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 355 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 356 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 357 +Read-only options are not be modified. 358 + 359 +</DD></DL> 360 +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A> 361 +</DT><DD> 362 + 363 +Calls the command specified by the option <B>-command</B>. 364 + 365 +</DD></DL> 366 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Label.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>Label</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>Label</B> 6 + - Label widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Label</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT> 15 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 16 +<TR> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR> 18 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 19 +</TR> 20 +<TR> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR> 22 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 23 +</TR> 24 +<TR> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR> 26 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR> 27 +</TR> 28 +<TR> 29 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR> 30 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 31 +</TR> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR> 38 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR> 39 +</TR> 40 +<TR> 41 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR> 42 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TR> 43 +</TR> 44 +<TR> 45 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR> 46 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR> 47 +</TR> 48 +<TR> 49 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR> 50 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR> 51 +</TR> 52 +<TR> 53 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR> 54 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR> 55 +</TR> 56 +</TABLE></DD> 57 +<DT><I>Themed</I></DT> 58 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 59 +<TR> 60 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR> 61 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 62 +</TR> 63 +<TR> 64 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD></TR> 65 +<TR> 66 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR> 67 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 68 +</TR> 69 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR> 70 +</TR> 71 +<TR> 72 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD> 73 +</TR> 74 +<TR> 75 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD> 76 +</TR> 77 +<TR> 78 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR> 79 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR> 80 +</TR> 81 +<TR> 82 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR> 83 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR> 84 +</TR> 85 +</TABLE></DD> 86 +</DL> 87 +<DL> 88 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 89 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 90 +<TR> 91 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TR> 92 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TR> 93 +</TR> 94 +<TR> 95 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TR> 96 +<TD> <A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TR> 97 +</TR> 98 +<TR> 99 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TR> 100 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TR> 101 +</TR> 102 +<TR> 103 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TR> 104 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TR> 105 +</TR> 106 +<TR> 107 +<TD> <A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TR> 108 +<TD> <A HREF="#-focus">-focus</A></TR> 109 +</TR> 110 +<TR> 111 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR> 112 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR> 113 +</TR> 114 +<TR> 115 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR> 116 +<TD> <A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR> 117 +</TR> 118 +<TR> 119 +<TD> <A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TR> 120 +<TD> <A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR> 121 +</TR> 122 +<TR> 123 +<TD> <A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TR> 124 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR> 125 +</TR> 126 +</TABLE></DD> 127 +</DL> 128 +<DL> 129 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 130 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 131 + <I>option</I> 132 +</DD> 133 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 134 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 135 +</DD> 136 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A> 137 +</DD> 138 +</DL> 139 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 140 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 141 +<P> 142 + 143 +The <B>Label</B> widget extends the default Tk label. Options have been added to provide 144 +visual effect depending on the state of the Label, <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options, and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag 145 +</A> and <A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>. 146 +</P> 147 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 148 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 149 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT> 150 +<DD> 151 +A boolean specifying if drag is enabled. 152 +</DD> 153 +</DL> 154 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT> 155 +<DD> 156 + 157 +Specifies a command to be called when drag ended. 158 +<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the 159 +option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 160 + 161 +</DD> 162 +</DL> 163 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT> 164 +<DD> 165 + 166 +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag. 167 +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>. 168 + 169 +</DD> 170 +</DL> 171 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT> 172 +<DD> 173 + 174 +Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget. 175 +<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the 176 +option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 177 + 178 +<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the internal <B>draginitcmd</B> command is used instead 179 +and returns: 180 +<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1> 181 +<TR><TD valign=top><I>IMAGE {copy} <image name></I> 182 +<TD>if an image is displayed. 183 +<TR><TD valign=top><I>BITMAP {copy} <bitmap name></I> 184 +<TD>if a bitmap is displayed. 185 +<TR><TD valign=top><I>TEXT {copy} <text></I> 186 +<TD>if a text is displayed. 187 +</TABLE></DL> 188 +Note that if <B>dragtype</B> option is not empty, its value is used instead of those above. 189 + 190 +</DD> 191 +</DL> 192 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT> 193 +<DD> 194 + 195 +Specifies an alternate type of dragged object. 196 + 197 +</DD> 198 +</DL> 199 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT> 200 +<DD> 201 + 202 +Specifies a command to be called when drop occurs on the widget. 203 +<B>dropcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the 204 +option <B>dropcmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 205 + 206 +<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the command updates the label following the type of the data: 207 +<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1> 208 +<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD> 209 +<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Label.</TD> 210 +<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD> 211 +<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Label.</TD> 212 +<TR><TD><I>IMAGE</I></TD> 213 +<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated image.</TD> 214 +<TR><TD><I>BITMAP</I></TD> 215 +<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated bitmap. 216 +<B>image</B> option is set to empty.</TD> 217 +<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD> 218 +<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated string. 219 +<B>image</B> and <B>bitmap</B> options are set to empty.</TD> 220 +</TABLE></DL> 221 +and returns 1. 222 + 223 +</DD> 224 +</DL> 225 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT> 226 +<DD> 227 +A boolean specifying if drop is enabled. 228 +</DD> 229 +</DL> 230 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT> 231 +<DD> 232 + 233 +Specifies a command to be called when drag icon is over the widget. 234 +<B>dropovercmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the 235 +option <B>dropovercmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 236 + 237 +<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, Label always accepts the drop if data type is 238 +<I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, and accepts all other data type only if 239 +<B>state</B> is normal. 240 + 241 +</DD> 242 +</DL> 243 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT> 244 +<DD> 245 + 246 +Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation. 247 +See option <B>droptypes</B> of 248 +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 249 +for more infromation. 250 + 251 +Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, <I>TEXT</I>, <I>BITMAP</I> 252 +and <I>IMAGE</I>, all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations. 253 + 254 +</DD> 255 +</DL> 256 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-focus"><B>-focus</B></A></DT> 257 +<DD> 258 + 259 +Specifies a pathname to set the focus on for Label::<B>setfocus</B> command. 260 + 261 +</DD> 262 +</DL> 263 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 264 +<DD> 265 + 266 +Specifies a desired height for the label. 267 +If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in 268 +screen units, for text it is in lines of text. 269 +If this option isn't specified, the label's desired height is computed 270 +from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR> 271 +Option not available for <I>themed</I> widgets. 272 +</DD> 273 +</DL> 274 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT> 275 +<DD> 276 + 277 +Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget. 278 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 279 +</DD> 280 +</DL> 281 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT> 282 +<DD> 283 +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>. 284 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 285 +</DD> 286 +</DL> 287 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT> 288 +<DD> 289 +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>. 290 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 291 +</DD> 292 +</DL> 293 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT> 294 +<DD> 295 + 296 +Specifies a standard name for the label. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is 297 +found in the resource database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options 298 +are extracted from its value. 299 + 300 +</DD> 301 +</DL> 302 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT> 303 +<DD> 304 + 305 +Specifies one of two states for the Label: <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>. 306 +In normal state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option. 307 +In disabled state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B> option. 308 +</DD> 309 +</DL> 310 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT> 311 +<DD> 312 + 313 +Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label. 314 +0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character, 315 +and so on. 316 +<BR>The binding <B><Alt-<I>char</I>></B> is automatically set on the toplevel 317 +of the Label to call Label::<B>setfocus</B>. 318 + 319 +</DD> 320 +</DL> 321 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 322 +<DD> 323 + 324 +Specifies a desired width for the label. 325 +If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in 326 +screen units, for text it is in characters. 327 +If this option isn't specified, the label's desired width is computed 328 +from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. 329 + 330 +</DD> 331 +</DL> 332 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 333 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 334 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 335 + <I>option</I> 336 +</DT><DD> 337 + 338 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 339 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 340 +</DD></DL> 341 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 342 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 343 +</DT><DD> 344 + 345 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 346 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 347 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 348 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 349 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 350 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 351 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 352 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 353 +Read-only options are not be modified. 354 + 355 +</DD></DL> 356 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A> 357 +</DT><DD> 358 + 359 +Set the focus on the pathname given by <B>-focus</B> option if <B>-state</B> is <I>normal</I>. 360 + 361 +</DD></DL> 362 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/LabelEntry.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>LabelEntry</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>LabelEntry</B> 6 + - 7 +LabelFrame containing an Entry widget. 8 + 9 +</DD></DL> 10 +<DL> 11 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 12 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelEntry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 13 +</DL> 14 +<DL> 15 +<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT> 16 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 17 +<TR> 18 +<TD> -borderwidth or -bd</TD> 19 +<TD> -command</TD> 20 +</TR> 21 +<TR> 22 +<TD> -disabledforeground</TD> 23 +<TD> -dragenabled</TD> 24 +</TR> 25 +<TR> 26 +<TD> -dragendcmd</TD> 27 +<TD> -dragevent</TD> 28 +</TR> 29 +<TR> 30 +<TD> -draginitcmd</TD> 31 +<TD> -dragtype</TD> 32 +</TR> 33 +<TR> 34 +<TD> -dropcmd</TD> 35 +<TD> -dropenabled</TD> 36 +</TR> 37 +<TR> 38 +<TD> -dropovercmd</TD> 39 +<TD> -droptypes</TD> 40 +</TR> 41 +<TR> 42 +<TD> -editable</TD> 43 +<TD> -entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD> 44 +</TR> 45 +<TR> 46 +<TD> -entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD> 47 +<TD> -exportselection</TD> 48 +</TR> 49 +<TR> 50 +<TD> -font</TD> 51 +<TD> -helptext</TD> 52 +</TR> 53 +<TR> 54 +<TD> -helptype</TD> 55 +<TD> -helpvar</TD> 56 +</TR> 57 +<TR> 58 +<TD> -highlightbackground</TD> 59 +<TD> -highlightcolor</TD> 60 +</TR> 61 +<TR> 62 +<TD> -highlightthickness</TD> 63 +<TD> -insertbackground</TD> 64 +</TR> 65 +<TR> 66 +<TD> -insertborderwidth</TD> 67 +<TD> -insertofftime</TD> 68 +</TR> 69 +<TR> 70 +<TD> -insertontime</TD> 71 +<TD> -insertwidth</TD> 72 +</TR> 73 +<TR> 74 +<TD> -justify</TD> 75 +<TD> -relief</TD> 76 +</TR> 77 +<TR> 78 +<TD> -selectbackground</TD> 79 +<TD> -selectborderwidth</TD> 80 +</TR> 81 +<TR> 82 +<TD> -selectforeground</TD> 83 +<TD> -show</TD> 84 +</TR> 85 +<TR> 86 +<TD> -state</TD> 87 +<TD> -takefocus</TD> 88 +</TR> 89 +<TR> 90 +<TD> -text</TD> 91 +<TD> -textvariable</TD> 92 +</TR> 93 +<TR> 94 +<TD> -width</TD> 95 +<TD> -xscrollcommand</TD> 96 +</TR> 97 +</TABLE></DD> 98 +</DL> 99 +<DL> 100 +<DT><I><A HREF="LabelFrame.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelFrame</B></A></I></DT> 101 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 102 +<TR> 103 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 104 +<TD> -disabledforeground</TD> 105 +</TR> 106 +<TR> 107 +<TD> -foreground or -fg</TD> 108 +<TD> -helptext</TD> 109 +</TR> 110 +<TR> 111 +<TD> -helptype</TD> 112 +<TD> -helpvar</TD> 113 +</TR> 114 +<TR> 115 +<TD> -label (see <B>-text</B>)</TD> 116 +<TD> -labelanchor (see <B>-anchor</B>)</TD> 117 +</TR> 118 +<TR> 119 +<TD> -labelfont (see <B>-font</B>)</TD> 120 +<TD> -labelheight (see <B>-height</B>)</TD> 121 +</TR> 122 +<TR> 123 +<TD> -labeljustify (see <B>-justify</B>)</TD> 124 +<TD> -labelwidth (see <B>-width</B>)</TD> 125 +</TR> 126 +<TR> 127 +<TD> -name</TD> 128 +<TD> -padx</TD> 129 +</TR> 130 +<TR> 131 +<TD> -pady</TD> 132 +<TD> -side</TD> 133 +</TR> 134 +<TR> 135 +<TD> -state</TD> 136 +<TD> -underline</TD> 137 +</TR> 138 +<TR> 139 +<TD> -wraplength</TD> 140 +</TABLE></DD> 141 +</DL> 142 +<DL> 143 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 144 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A> 145 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 146 +</DD> 147 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 148 + <I>option</I> 149 +</DD> 150 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 151 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 152 +</DD> 153 +</DL> 154 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 155 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 156 +<P> 157 + 158 +LabelEntry is a widget composed of <A HREF="LabelFrame.html">LabelFrame</A> widget 159 +containing an <A HREF="Entry.html">Entry</A> widget. 160 +Tk entry command can also be used on LabelEntry widget. 161 + 162 +</P> 163 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 164 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 165 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A> 166 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 167 +</DT><DD> 168 + 169 +Set bindings on the entry widget. 170 + 171 +</DD></DL> 172 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 173 + <I>option</I> 174 +</DT><DD> 175 + 176 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 177 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 178 +</DD></DL> 179 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 180 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 181 +</DT><DD> 182 + 183 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 184 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 185 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 186 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 187 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 188 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 189 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 190 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 191 +Read-only options are not be modified. 192 + 193 +</DD></DL> 194 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/LabelFrame.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>LabelFrame</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>LabelFrame</B> 6 + - Frame with a Label 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR> 18 +</TR> 19 +</TABLE></DD> 20 +</DL> 21 +<DL> 22 +<DT><I><A HREF="Label.html">OPTIONS from <B>Label</B></A></I></DT> 23 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 24 +<TR> 25 +<TD> -anchor</TD> 26 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 27 +</TR> 28 +<TR> 29 +<TD> -bitmap</TD> 30 +<TD> -disabledforeground</TD> 31 +</TR> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> -focus</TD> 34 +<TD> -font</TD> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> -foreground or -fg</TD> 38 +<TD> -height</TD> 39 +</TR> 40 +<TR> 41 +<TD> -helptext</TD> 42 +<TD> -helptype</TD> 43 +</TR> 44 +<TR> 45 +<TD> -helpvar</TD> 46 +<TD> -image</TD> 47 +</TR> 48 +<TR> 49 +<TD> -justify</TD> 50 +<TD> -name</TD> 51 +</TR> 52 +<TR> 53 +<TD> -padx</TD> 54 +<TD> -pady</TD> 55 +</TR> 56 +<TR> 57 +<TD> -state</TD> 58 +<TD> -text</TD> 59 +</TR> 60 +<TR> 61 +<TD> -textvariable</TD> 62 +<TD> -underline</TD> 63 +</TR> 64 +<TR> 65 +<TD> -width</TD> 66 +<TD> -wraplength</TD> 67 +</TABLE></DD> 68 +</DL> 69 +<DL> 70 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 71 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 72 +<TR> 73 +<TD> <A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR> 74 +</TABLE></DD> 75 +</DL> 76 +<DL> 77 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 78 +<DD>LabelFrame::<A HREF="#align"><B>align</B></A> 79 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 80 +</DD> 81 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 82 + <I>option</I> 83 +</DD> 84 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 85 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 86 +</DD> 87 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A> 88 +</DD> 89 +</DL> 90 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 91 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 92 +<P> 93 + 94 +LabelFrame enables user to create a frame with a 95 +<A HREF="Label.html">Label</A> positionned at any side. 96 +LabelFrame is used by <A HREF="ComboBox.html">ComboBox</A> 97 +and <A HREF="SpinBox.html">SpinBox</A>. 98 +</P> 99 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 100 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 101 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT> 102 +<DD> 103 + 104 +Specifies where to position the Label relative to the user frame: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B> or <B>right</B>. 105 +</DD> 106 +</DL> 107 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 108 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 109 +<DL><DT><A NAME="align">LabelFrame::<B>align</B></A> 110 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 111 +</DT><DD> 112 + 113 +This command align label of all widget given by <I>args</I> of class LabelFrame 114 +(or "derived") by setting their width to the max one +1 115 + 116 +</DD></DL> 117 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 118 + <I>option</I> 119 +</DT><DD> 120 + 121 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 122 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 123 +</DD></DL> 124 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 125 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 126 +</DT><DD> 127 + 128 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 129 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 130 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 131 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 132 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 133 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 134 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 135 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 136 +Read-only options are not be modified. 137 + 138 +</DD></DL> 139 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 140 +</DT><DD> 141 + 142 +Return the frame where the user can create any other widget. 143 +</DD></DL> 144 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ListBox.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>ListBox</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>ListBox</B> 6 + - ListBox widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ListBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD> 26 +</TR> 27 +<TR> 28 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD> 29 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD> 30 +</TR> 31 +<TR> 32 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD> 34 +</TR> 35 +<TR> 36 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD> 38 +</TR> 39 +</TABLE></DD> 40 +</DL> 41 +<DL> 42 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 43 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 44 +<TR> 45 +<TD> <A HREF="#-autofocus">-autofocus</A></TD> 46 +<TD> <A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD> 47 +<TD> <A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD> 48 +</TR> 49 +<TR> 50 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD> 51 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD> 52 +</TR> 53 +<TR> 54 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD> 55 +<TD> <A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD> 56 +</TR> 57 +<TR> 58 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD> 59 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD> 60 +</TR> 61 +<TR> 62 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD> 63 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD> 64 +</TR> 65 +<TR> 66 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD> 67 +<TD> <A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD> 68 +</TR> 69 +<TR> 70 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD> 71 +<TD> <A HREF="#-multicolumn">-multicolumn</A></TD> 72 +</TR> 73 +<TR> 74 +<TD> <A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD> 75 +<TD> <A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD> 76 +</TR> 77 +<TR> 78 +<TD> <A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD> 79 +<TD> <A HREF="#-selectmode">-selectmode</A></TD> 80 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD> 81 +</TABLE></DD> 82 +</DL> 83 +<DL> 84 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 85 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A> 86 + <I>event</I> 87 + <I>script</I> 88 +</DD> 89 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A> 90 + <I>event</I> 91 + <I>script</I> 92 +</DD> 93 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 94 + <I>option</I> 95 +</DD> 96 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 97 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 98 +</DD> 99 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A> 100 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 101 +</DD> 102 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A> 103 + <I>item</I> 104 + <I>text</I> 105 + ?<I>verifycmd</I>? 106 + ?<I>clickres</I>? 107 + ?<I>select</I>? 108 +</DD> 109 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A> 110 + <I>item</I> 111 +</DD> 112 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A> 113 + <I>item</I> 114 +</DD> 115 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A> 116 + <I>index</I> 117 + <I>item</I> 118 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 119 +</DD> 120 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#item"><B>item</B></A> 121 + <I>first</I> 122 + ?<I>last</I>? 123 +</DD> 124 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A> 125 + <I>item</I> 126 + <I>option</I> 127 +</DD> 128 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A> 129 + <I>item</I> 130 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 131 +</DD> 132 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#items"><B>items</B></A> 133 + ?<I>first</I>? 134 + ?<I>last</I>? 135 +</DD> 136 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A> 137 + <I>item</I> 138 + <I>index</I> 139 +</DD> 140 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A> 141 + <I>neworder</I> 142 +</DD> 143 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A> 144 + <I>item</I> 145 +</DD> 146 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A> 147 + <I>cmd</I> 148 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 149 +</DD> 150 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A> 151 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 152 +</DD> 153 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A> 154 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 155 +</DD> 156 +</DL> 157 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 158 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 159 +<P> 160 + 161 +<B>ListBox</B> widget uses canvas to display a list of items. 162 +Each item is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional 163 +image or window. Each item is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the 164 +<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height. 165 +A item is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the 166 +<B>insert</B> command). The ListBox can have one or more columns, depending on 167 +<B>multicolumn</B> option. The user do not handle columns; the number of columns 168 +is determined following the height of the ListBox in order to see each item vertically. 169 + 170 +</P> 171 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 172 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 173 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-autofocus"><B>-autofocus (read-only)</B></A></DT> 174 +<DD> 175 + If this option is true, the listbox will take focus any time the user 176 + clicks in it. Without focus, the listbox's mouse wheel bindings will 177 + not work properly. The default is true. 178 +</DD> 179 +</DL> 180 + 181 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT> 182 +<DD> 183 + 184 +Specifies horizontal pad between each columns. 185 + 186 +</DD> 187 +</DL> 188 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT> 189 +<DD> 190 + 191 +Specifies vertical size of the items. 192 + 193 +</DD> 194 +</DL> 195 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT> 196 +<DD> 197 +A boolean specifying if drag is enabled. 198 +</DD> 199 +</DL> 200 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT> 201 +<DD> 202 + 203 +Specifies a command to be called when drag ended. 204 +<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the 205 +option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 206 + 207 +</DD> 208 +</DL> 209 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT> 210 +<DD> 211 + 212 +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag. 213 +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>. 214 + 215 +</DD> 216 +</DL> 217 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT> 218 +<DD> 219 + 220 +ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag 221 +if no item is designated. In other cases: 222 +<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns: 223 +<UL> 224 +<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> if empty as the data type, 225 +<LI><I>{move copy link}</I> as the operations, 226 +<LI>the item identifier as the data. 227 +</UL> 228 +If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments: 229 +<UL> 230 +<LI>the pathname of the listbox, 231 +<LI>the identifier of the dragged item, 232 +<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data. 233 +</UL> 234 +and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in 235 +<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 236 + 237 +</DD> 238 +</DL> 239 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT> 240 +<DD> 241 + 242 +Specifies an alternate type of dragged object. 243 + 244 +</DD> 245 +</DL> 246 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT> 247 +<DD> 248 + 249 +ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling 250 +and extract item and position. 251 +<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments: 252 +<UL> 253 +<LI>the pathname of the listbox, 254 +<LI>the pathname of the drag source, 255 +<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be: 256 +<UL> 257 +<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>, 258 +<LI><I>{</I><B>item</B> <I>item}</I> or 259 +<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>index}</I>. 260 +</UL> 261 +<LI>the current operation, 262 +<LI>the data type, 263 +<LI>the data. 264 +</UL> 265 + 266 +<p> 267 +The default drop command allows for drag-and-drop within the listbox but 268 +not to or from other widgets. 269 +</p> 270 + 271 +</DD> 272 +</DL> 273 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT> 274 +<DD> 275 +A boolean specifying if drop is enabled. 276 +</DD> 277 +</DL> 278 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT> 279 +<DD> 280 + 281 +LsitBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling 282 +and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>. 283 +If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments: 284 +<UL> 285 +<LI>the pathname of the listbox, 286 +<LI>the pathname of the drag source, 287 +<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are: 288 +<UL> 289 +<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string. 290 +<LI>the targeted item if drag icon points an item and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains 291 +<I>i</I>, else empty string. 292 +<LI>an index within two items where drag icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option 293 +contains <I>p</I>, else empty string. 294 +<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside an item and between two 295 +items. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>item</I>. 296 +</UL> 297 +<LI>the current operation, 298 +<LI>the data type, 299 +<LI>the data. 300 +</UL> 301 +The command must return a list with two elements: 302 +<UL> 303 +<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of 304 +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>, 305 +<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>item</I> or <I>position</I>. 306 +</UL> 307 + 308 +</DD> 309 +</DL> 310 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT> 311 +<DD> 312 + 313 +Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of 314 +<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget, 315 +<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two items, 316 +and <B>i</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside items. 317 + 318 +</DD> 319 +</DL> 320 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT> 321 +<DD> 322 + 323 +Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation. 324 +See option <B>droptypes</B> of 325 +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 326 +for more infromation. 327 + 328 +<BR>Default is <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>. 329 + 330 +</DD> 331 +</DL> 332 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 333 +<DD> 334 + 335 +Specifies the desired height for the listbox in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels. 336 + 337 +</DD> 338 +</DL> 339 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-multicolumn"><B>-multicolumn</B></A></DT> 340 +<DD> 341 + 342 +Specifies wether or not ListBox layouts items in order to see each one vertically. 343 + 344 +</DD> 345 +</DL> 346 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT> 347 +<DD> 348 + 349 +Specifies distance between image or window and text of the items. 350 + 351 +</DD> 352 +</DL> 353 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT> 354 +<DD> 355 + 356 +Specifies wether or not the listbox should be redrawn when entering idle. 357 +Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the listbox. 358 + 359 +</DD> 360 +</DL> 361 + 362 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill (read-only)</B></A></DT> 363 +<DD> 364 + If true, the listbox will draw a selection rectangle that fills the 365 + listbox from left-to-right instead of just drawing a box around the 366 + selected item. This more closely mimics the standard Tk listbox. 367 +</DD> 368 +</DL> 369 + 370 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectmode"><B>-selectmode</B></A></DT> 371 +<DD> 372 + 373 +Specifies the desired selection-mode for the listbox. Must be one of 374 +<B>none</B>, <B>single</B> or <B>multiple</B>. <B>selectmode</B> <I>single</I> 375 +allows to select 1 item by its text or image. <B>selectmode</B> <I>multiple</I> 376 +allows to select multiple items by their text or image. For more info on 377 +selectmodes <I>single</I> or <I>multiple</I>, see the Tk <B>listbox</B> 378 +command. Default value for <B>selectmode</B> is <I>none</I>. 379 + 380 +</DD> 381 +</DL> 382 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 383 +<DD> 384 + 385 +Specifies the desired width for the listbox in units of 8 pixels. 386 + 387 +</DD> 388 +</DL> 389 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 390 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 391 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A> 392 + <I>event</I> 393 + <I>script</I> 394 +</DT><DD> 395 + 396 +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event 397 +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a item. 398 +The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command. 399 + 400 +<p> 401 +Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the 402 +path of the listbox. 403 +</p> 404 + 405 +</DD></DL> 406 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A> 407 + <I>event</I> 408 + <I>script</I> 409 +</DT><DD> 410 + 411 +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event 412 +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a item. 413 +The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command. 414 + 415 +<p> 416 +Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the 417 +path of the listbox. 418 +</p> 419 + 420 +</DD></DL> 421 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 422 + <I>option</I> 423 +</DT><DD> 424 + 425 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 426 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 427 +</DD></DL> 428 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 429 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 430 +</DT><DD> 431 + 432 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 433 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 434 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 435 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 436 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 437 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 438 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 439 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 440 +Read-only options are not be modified. 441 + 442 +</DD></DL> 443 +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A> 444 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 445 +</DT><DD> 446 + 447 +Deletes all items in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list 448 +of items or a list of list of items. 449 +To delete all items, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName items]</I>. 450 + 451 +</DD></DL> 452 +<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A> 453 + <I>item</I> 454 + <I>text</I> 455 + ?<I>verifycmd</I>? 456 + ?<I>clickres</I>? 457 + ?<I>select</I>? 458 +</DT><DD> 459 + 460 +Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of an item. 461 +<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the 462 +edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text 463 +if edition is accepted. 464 +<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return. 465 +<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area. 466 +If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled. 467 +If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted. 468 +In all other case, the edition continues. 469 +<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with 470 +the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it 471 +and continue edition. 472 +<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1. 473 + 474 +</DD></DL> 475 +<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A> 476 + <I>item</I> 477 +</DT><DD> 478 + 479 +Returns 1 if <I>item</I> exists in the listbox, else 0. 480 + 481 +</DD></DL> 482 +<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A> 483 + <I>item</I> 484 +</DT><DD> 485 + 486 +Returns the position of <I>item</I> in the list. 487 + 488 +</DD></DL> 489 +<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A> 490 + <I>index</I> 491 + <I>item</I> 492 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 493 +</DT><DD> 494 + 495 +<p> 496 +Inserts a new item identified by <I>item</I> in the list at position <I>index</I>. 497 +</p> 498 + 499 +<p> 500 +Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the item name will be replaced by the 501 +number of the item in the order of insertion. 502 +</p> 503 + 504 +<P> 505 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT> 506 +<DD> 507 + 508 +User data associated to the item. 509 + 510 +</DD> 511 +</DL> 512 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT> 513 +<DD> 514 + 515 +Specifies the foreground color of the label of the item. 516 + 517 +</DD> 518 +</DL> 519 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT> 520 +<DD> 521 + 522 +Specifies a font for the label of the item. 523 + 524 +</DD> 525 +</DL> 526 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT> 527 +<DD> 528 + 529 +Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the item. 530 +<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>. 531 +</DD> 532 +</DL> 533 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-indent"><B>-indent</B></A></DT> 534 +<DD> 535 + 536 +Specifies the amount of extra space in pixels at the left of the item. 537 + 538 +</DD> 539 +</DL> 540 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT> 541 +<DD> 542 + 543 +Specifies the label of the item. 544 + 545 +</DD> 546 +</DL> 547 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT> 548 +<DD> 549 + 550 +Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the item. 551 +<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>. 552 +</DD> 553 +</DL> 554 +</DD></DL> 555 +<DL><DT><A NAME="item"><I>pathName</I> <B>item</B></A> 556 + <I>first</I> 557 + ?<I>last</I>? 558 +</DT><DD> 559 + 560 +<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>items</I> instead.</B><BR> 561 +If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the item at index <I>first</I> in the list, 562 +or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. 563 +If <I>last</I> is specified, the command returns a list whose elements are all 564 +of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, inclusive. 565 +Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard forms for indices. 566 + 567 +</DD></DL> 568 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A> 569 + <I>item</I> 570 + <I>option</I> 571 +</DT><DD> 572 + 573 +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item. 574 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command. 575 + 576 +</DD></DL> 577 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A> 578 + <I>item</I> 579 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 580 +</DT><DD> 581 + 582 +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the 583 +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for 584 +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 585 +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated 586 +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified, 587 +returns a list describing the current options for the item. 588 +Read-only options are not be modified. 589 + 590 +</DD></DL> 591 +<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A> 592 + ?<I>first</I>? 593 + ?<I>last</I>? 594 +</DT><DD> 595 + 596 +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all items. 597 +If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the item at index 598 +<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. 599 +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements 600 +are all of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, 601 +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard 602 +forms for indices. 603 + 604 +</DD></DL> 605 +<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A> 606 + <I>item</I> 607 + <I>index</I> 608 +</DT><DD> 609 + 610 +Moves <I>item</I> at position <I>index</I> in the list. 611 + 612 +</DD></DL> 613 +<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A> 614 + <I>neworder</I> 615 +</DT><DD> 616 + 617 +Modifies the order of items in the listbox given by <I>neworder</I>. Items that do not 618 +appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved. 619 + 620 +</DD></DL> 621 +<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A> 622 + <I>item</I> 623 +</DT><DD> 624 + 625 +Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>item</I> visible. 626 + 627 +</DD></DL> 628 +<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A> 629 + <I>cmd</I> 630 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 631 +</DT><DD> 632 + 633 +Modifies the list of selected items following <I>cmd</I>: 634 +<DL> 635 +<DT><B>clear</B> 636 +<DD>remove all items of the selection. 637 +<DT><B>set</B> 638 +<DD>set the selection to all items in <I>arg</I> 639 +<DT><B>add</B> 640 +<DD>add all items of <I>arg</I> in the selection 641 +<DT><B>remove</B> 642 +<DD>remove all items of <I>arg</I> of the selection 643 +<DT><B>get</B> 644 +<DD>return the current selected items 645 +</DL> 646 + 647 +</DD></DL> 648 +<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A> 649 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 650 +</DT><DD> 651 + 652 +Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>. 653 + 654 +</DD></DL> 655 +<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A> 656 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 657 +</DT><DD> 658 + 659 +Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>. 660 + 661 +</DD></DL> 662 + 663 + 664 +<b>BINDINGS</b> 665 + 666 +<p> 667 +A <b><<ListboxSelect>></b> virtual event is generated any time the 668 +selection in the listbox changes. 669 +</p> 670 + 671 +<p> 672 +The listbox has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus. 673 +</p> 674 +</p> 675 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/MainFrame.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>MainFrame</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>MainFrame</B> 6 + - Manage toplevel with menu, toolbar and statusbar 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MainFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 17 +<TD> -progressfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> -progressmax (see <B>-maximum</B>)</TD> 21 +<TD> -progresstype (see <B>-type</B>)</TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> -progressvar (see <B>-variable</B>)</TD> 25 +</TR> 26 +</TABLE></DD> 27 +</DL> 28 +<DL> 29 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 30 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 31 +<TR> 32 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD></TR> 33 +<TR> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="#-menu">-menu</A></TD> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TD></TR> 38 +<TR> 39 +<TD> <A HREF="#-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD> 40 +</TR> 41 +<TR> 42 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD></TR> 43 +<TD> <A HREF="#-sizegrip">-sizegrip</A></TR> 44 +</TABLE></DD> 45 +</DL> 46 +<DL> 47 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 48 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addindicator"><B>addindicator</B></A> 49 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 50 +</DD> 51 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addtoolbar"><B>addtoolbar</B></A> 52 +</DD> 53 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 54 + <I>option</I> 55 +</DD> 56 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 57 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 58 +</DD> 59 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A> 60 +</DD> 61 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getindicator"><B>getindicator</B></A> 62 + <I>index</I> 63 +</DD> 64 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getmenu"><B>getmenu</B></A> 65 + <I>menuid</I> 66 +</DD> 67 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#gettoolbar"><B>gettoolbar</B></A> 68 + <I>index</I> 69 +</DD> 70 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setmenustate"><B>setmenustate</B></A> 71 + <I>tag</I> 72 + <I>state</I> 73 +</DD> 74 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showstatusbar"><B>showstatusbar</B></A> 75 + <I>name</I> 76 +</DD> 77 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showtoolbar"><B>showtoolbar</B></A> 78 + <I>index</I> 79 + <I>bool</I> 80 +</DD> 81 +</DL> 82 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 83 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 84 +<P> 85 + 86 +MainFrame manage toplevel to have:<BR> 87 +<UL> 88 +<LI>simple menu creation, with automatic accelerator bindings and 89 +<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> association,</LI> 90 +<LI>one or more toolbars that user can hide,</LI> 91 +<LI>a status bar, displaying a user message or a menu description, and optionally a 92 +<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>.</LI> 93 +</UL> 94 +</P> 95 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 96 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 97 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 98 +<DD> 99 + 100 +Specifies the desired height for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to 101 +Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window 102 +will not request any size at all. 103 +</DD> 104 +</DL> 105 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-menu"><B>-menu (read-only)</B></A></DT> 106 +<DD> 107 + 108 +This option describes the menu. This is a list whose each five elements describe 109 +one cascade menu. It has the following form: 110 +{<I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>...} 111 +where <I>menuentries</I> is a list where each element describe one menu entry, which can be: 112 +<UL> 113 +<LI>for a separator:<BR> 114 + {<B>separator</B>}</LI> 115 +<LI>for a command:<BR> 116 + {<B>command</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI> 117 +<LI>for a check button:<BR> 118 + {<B>checkbutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI> 119 +<LI>for a radio button:<BR> 120 + {<B>radiobutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI> 121 +<LI>for a cascade menu:<BR> 122 + {<B>cascade</B> <I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>}</LI> 123 +</UL> 124 +where: 125 +<UL> 126 +<LI><I>menuname</I> is the name of the menu. If it contains a &, the following character 127 +is automatically converted to the corresponding <B>-underline</B> option of <B>menu add</B> 128 +command.</LI> 129 +<LI><I>tags</I> is the tags list for the entry, used for enabling or disabling menu 130 +entries with <B>MainFrame::setmenustate</B>.</LI> 131 +<LI><I>menuId</I> is an id for the menu, from which you can get menu pathname with 132 + <B>MainFrame::getmenu</B>.</LI> 133 +<LI><I>tearoff</I> specifies if menu has tearoff entry.</LI> 134 +<LI><I>description</I> specifies a string for <A HREF=\"DynamicHelp.html\">DynamicHelp</A>.</LI> 135 +<LI><I>accelerator</I> specifies a key sequence. It is a list of two elements, where the first 136 +is one of <B>Shift</B>, <B>Ctrl</B>, <B>Alt</B>, <B>CtrlAlt</B>, <B>Cmd</B>, or <B>ShiftCmd</B>, and the second as letter 137 +(see <A HREF="#-casesensitive">-casesensitive</A> option for interpretation), digit or 138 +a special key name. 139 +An accelerator string is build and corresponding binding set on the toplevel to invoke the 140 +menu entry.</LI> 141 +<LI><I>option value</I> specifies additionnal options for the entry (see <B>menu add</B> 142 +command).</LI> 143 +</UL> 144 +Each value enclosed by ? are optional and defaulted to empty string, but must be 145 +provided if one or more following options is not empty. 146 +<BR>Example: 147 +<PRE> 148 +set descmenu { 149 + "&File" {} {} 0 { 150 + {command "&New" {} "Create a new document" {Ctrl n} -command Menu::new} 151 + {command "&Open..." {} "Open an existing document" {Ctrl o} -command Menu::open} 152 + {command "&Save" open "Save the document" {Ctrl s} -command Menu::save} 153 + {cascade "&Export" {} export 0 { 154 + {command "Format &1" open "Export document to format 1" {} -command {Menu::export 1}} 155 + {command "Format &2" open "Export document to format 2" {} -command {Menu::export 2}} 156 + }} 157 + {separator} 158 + {cascade "&Recent files" {} recent 0 {}} 159 + {separator} 160 + {command "E&xit" {} "Exit the application" {} -command Menu::exit} 161 + } 162 + "&Options" {} {} 0 { 163 + {checkbutton "Toolbar" {} "Show/hide toolbar" {} 164 + -variable Menu::_drawtoolbar 165 + -command {$Menu::_mainframe showtoolbar toolbar $Menu::_drawtoolbar} 166 + } 167 + } 168 +} 169 +</PRE> 170 + 171 +</DD> 172 +</DL> 173 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT> 174 +<DD> 175 + 176 +Specifies if separator should be drawn at the top and/or at the bottom of the user window. 177 +Must be one of the values <B>none</B>, <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>both</B>. 178 +It depends on the relief of subwidgets of user window. 179 +</DD> 180 +</DL> 181 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-textvariable"><B>-textvariable</B></A></DT> 182 +<DD> 183 + 184 +Specifies the textvariable option for the label of the status bar. 185 +<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> description 186 +of menu entries are mapped to this variable at the creation of the MainFrame. 187 +If this variable is changed by MainFrame::configure, menu description will 188 +not be available. 189 +<BR>You change the text of the label by modifying the value of the variable. 190 +</DD> 191 +</DL> 192 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 193 +<DD> 194 + 195 +Specifies the desired width for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to 196 +Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window 197 +will not request any size at all. 198 +</DD> 199 +</DL> 200 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-sizegrip"><B>-sizegrip (themed, read-only)</B></A></DT> 201 +<DD> 202 + 203 +If bool argument is true and themed mode, show a ttk sizegrip widget in the lower-right corner. 204 +</DD> 205 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 206 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 207 +<DL><DT><A NAME="addindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>addindicator</B></A> 208 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 209 +</DT><DD> 210 + 211 +Add an indicator box at the right of the status bar. Each indicator are added from left 212 +to right. An indicator is a Tk label widget configured with option-value pair 213 +given by ?<I>arg...</I>?. <B>-relief</B> and <B>-borderwidth</B> options are respetively 214 +defaulted to <I>sunken</I> and 1. Returns the pathname of the created label. 215 +</DD></DL> 216 +<DL><DT><A NAME="addtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>addtoolbar</B></A> 217 +</DT><DD> 218 + 219 +Add a toolbar to the MainFrame. Returns the pathname of the new window where to place 220 +toolbar items. 221 +</DD></DL> 222 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 223 + <I>option</I> 224 +</DT><DD> 225 + 226 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 227 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 228 +</DD></DL> 229 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 230 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 231 +</DT><DD> 232 + 233 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 234 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 235 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 236 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 237 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 238 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 239 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 240 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 241 +Read-only options are not be modified. 242 + 243 +</DD></DL> 244 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 245 +</DT><DD> 246 + 247 +Returns the pathname of the user window. 248 +</DD></DL> 249 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>getindicator</B></A> 250 + <I>index</I> 251 +</DT><DD> 252 + 253 +Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added indicator. 254 +</DD></DL> 255 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenu"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenu</B></A> 256 + <I>menuid</I> 257 +</DT><DD> 258 + 259 +Returns the pathname of the menu whose id is <I>menuid</I>. 260 +</DD></DL> 261 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenustate</B></A> 262 + <I>tag</I> 263 + <I>state</I> 264 +</DT><DD> 265 + 266 +Returns the state of the given menu <I>tag</I>. 267 +</DD></DL> 268 +<DL><DT><A NAME="gettoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>gettoolbar</B></A> 269 + <I>index</I> 270 +</DT><DD> 271 + 272 +Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added toolbar. 273 +</DD></DL> 274 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>setmenustate</B></A> 275 + <I>tag</I> 276 + <I>state</I> 277 +</DT><DD> 278 + 279 +Set the <B>-state</B> option value of all the menu entries that have the tag <I>tag</I> 280 +to <I>state</I>. 281 +A menu entry is disabled, if one of its associated tags have state <B>disabled</B>. 282 + 283 +</DD></DL> 284 +<DL><DT><A NAME="showstatusbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showstatusbar</B></A> 285 + <I>name</I> 286 +</DT><DD> 287 + 288 +<I>name</I> is one of <B>none</B>, <B>status</B> or <B>progression</B>. 289 +Use <B>none</B> to hide the status bar, <B>status</B> to display the label only, or 290 +<B>progression</B> to display the label and the 291 +<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>. 292 +</DD></DL> 293 +<DL><DT><A NAME="showtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showtoolbar</B></A> 294 + <I>index</I> 295 + <I>bool</I> 296 +</DT><DD> 297 + 298 +Hide if <I>bool</I> is 0, or show if <I>bool</I> is 1 the <I>index</I>th added toolbar. 299 +To prevent your toplevel from resizing while hiding/showing toolbar, 300 +do [wm geometry $top [wm geometry $top]] when it is managed. 301 +</DD></DL> 302 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/MessageDlg.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>MessageDlg</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>MessageDlg</B> 6 + - Message dialog box 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MessageDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD> 25 +</TABLE></DD> 26 +</DL> 27 +<DL> 28 +<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT> 29 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 30 +<TR> 31 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 32 +<TD> -cancel</TD> 33 +</TR> 34 +<TR> 35 +<TD> -default</TD> 36 +<TD> -parent</TD> 37 +</TR> 38 +</TABLE></DD> 39 +</DL> 40 +<DL> 41 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 42 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 43 +<TR> 44 +<TD> <A HREF="#-aspect">-aspect</A></TD> 45 +<TD> <A HREF="#-buttons">-buttons</A></TD> 46 +</TR> 47 +<TR> 48 +<TD> <A HREF="#-buttonwidth">-buttonwidth</A></TD> 49 +<TD> <A HREF="#-icon">-icon</A></TD> 50 +</TR> 51 +<TR> 52 +<TD> <A HREF="#-justify">-justify</A></TD> 53 +<TD> <A HREF="#-message">-message</A></TD> 54 +</TR> 55 +<TR> 56 +<TD> <A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TD> 57 +<TD> <A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TD> 58 +<TR> 59 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD> 60 +</TR> 61 +</TR> 62 +</TABLE></DD> 63 +</DL> 64 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 65 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 66 +<P> 67 + 68 +MessageDlg provides a simple way to display a message dialog. 69 +MessageDlg::<B>create</B> creates the message dialog, displays 70 +it and return the index of the pressed button, or -1 if it is destroyed. 71 +When returning, the dialog no longer exists. 72 + 73 +</P> 74 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 75 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 76 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-aspect"><B>-aspect</B></A></DT> 77 +<DD> 78 + 79 +Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating desired 80 +aspect ratio for the text. The aspect ratio is specified as 81 +100*width/height. 100 means the text should 82 +be as wide as it is tall, 200 means the text should 83 +be twice as wide as it is tall, 50 means the text should 84 +be twice as tall as it is wide, and so on. 85 +Used to choose line length for text if <B>width</B> option 86 +isn't specified. 87 +Defaults to 150. 88 + 89 +</DD> 90 +</DL> 91 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttons"><B>-buttons</B></A></DT> 92 +<DD> 93 + 94 +Specifies a list of buttons to display when <B>type</B> option is <I>user</I>. 95 +If a button has a symbolic name, its associated text will be displayed. 96 + 97 +</DD> 98 +</DL> 99 + 100 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttonwidth"><B>-buttonwidth</B></A></DT> 101 +<DD> 102 + Specifies the standard width of the buttons in the dialog. 103 +</DD> 104 +</DL> 105 + 106 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-icon"><B>-icon</B></A></DT> 107 +<DD> 108 + 109 +Specifies an icon to display. Must be one of the following: <B>error</B>, <B>info</B>, 110 +<B>question</B> or <B>warning</B>. 111 + 112 +</DD> 113 +</DL> 114 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-justify"><B>-justify</B></A></DT> 115 +<DD> 116 + 117 +Specifies how to justify lines of text. 118 +Must be one of <B>left</B>, <B>center</B>, or <B>right</B>. Defaults 119 +to <B>left</B>. 120 +This option works together with the <B>anchor</B>, <B>aspect</B>, 121 +<B>padx</B>, <B>pady</B>, and <B>width</B> options to provide a variety 122 +of arrangements of the text within the window. 123 +The <B>aspect</B> and <B>width</B> options determine the amount of 124 +screen space needed to display the text. 125 +The <B>anchor</B>, <B>padx</B>, and <B>pady</B> options determine where this 126 +rectangular area is displayed within the widget's window, and the 127 +<B>justify</B> option determines how each line is displayed within that 128 +rectangular region. 129 +For example, suppose <B>anchor</B> is <B>e</B> and <B>justify</B> is 130 +<B>left</B>, and that the message window is much larger than needed 131 +for the text. 132 +The the text will displayed so that the left edges of all the lines 133 +line up and the right edge of the longest line is <B>padx</B> from 134 +the right side of the window; the entire text block will be centered 135 +in the vertical span of the window. 136 + 137 +</DD> 138 +</DL> 139 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-message"><B>-message</B></A></DT> 140 +<DD> 141 + 142 +Specifies the message to display in this message box. 143 + 144 +</DD> 145 +</DL> 146 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT> 147 +<DD> 148 + 149 +Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box. 150 +If the value is empty (the default), a default title will be set corresponding 151 +to the <B>icon</B> option. 152 +The default associated title is in english, and can be modified to set it in 153 +another language by specifying the resource: 154 +<PRE> *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title: <I>value</I></PRE> 155 +or the equivalent tcl command: 156 +<PRE> option add *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title <I>value</I></PRE> 157 +where <I>name</I> is the name of an icon as defined in the <B>icon</B> option. 158 +<BR>For example, for french language, you can specify for a warning dialog: 159 +<PRE> option add *MessageDlg.warningTitle "Attention"</PRE> 160 + 161 +</DD> 162 +</DL> 163 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT> 164 +<DD> 165 + 166 +Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible: 167 +<DD> 168 +<P> 169 +<DL COMPACT> 170 +<DT> 171 +<B>abortretryignore</B> 172 +<DD> 173 +Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>abort</B>, 174 +<B>retry</B> and <B>ignore</B>.<P> 175 +<DT> 176 +<B>ok</B> 177 +<DD> 178 +Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P> 179 +<DT> 180 +<B>okcancel</B> 181 +<DD> 182 +Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P> 183 +<DT> 184 +<B>retrycancel</B> 185 +<DD> 186 +Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>retry</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P> 187 +<DT> 188 +<B>yesno</B> 189 +<DD> 190 +Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B> and <B>no</B>.<P> 191 +<DT> 192 +<B>yesnocancel</B> 193 +<DD> 194 +Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B>, <B>no</B> 195 +and <B>cancel</B>. 196 +<P> 197 +<DT> 198 +<B>user</B> 199 +<DD> 200 +Displays buttons of <B>-buttons</B> option.<P> 201 +<DT> 202 +</DL COMPACT> 203 + 204 +</DD> 205 +</DL> 206 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 207 +<DD> 208 + 209 +Specifies the length of lines in the window. 210 +If this option has a value greater than zero then the <B>aspect</B> 211 +option is ignored and the <B>width</B> option determines the line 212 +length. 213 +If this option has a value less than or equal to zero, then 214 +the <B>aspect</B> option determines the line length. 215 + 216 +</DD> 217 +</DL> 218 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/NoteBook.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>NoteBook</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>NoteBook</B> 6 + - Notebook manager widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>NoteBook</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR> 17 +</TABLE></DD> 18 +</DL> 19 +<DL> 20 +<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT> 21 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 22 +<TR> 23 +<TD> -activebackground</TD> 24 +<TD> -activeforeground</TD> 25 +</TR> 26 +<TR> 27 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 28 +<TD> -borderwidth or -bd</TD> 29 +</TR> 30 +<TR> 31 +<TD> -disabledforeground</TD> 32 +<TD> -foreground or -fg</TD> 33 +</TR> 34 +<TR> 35 +<TD> -repeatdelay</TD> 36 +<TD> -repeatinterval</TD> 37 +</TR> 38 +</TABLE></DD> 39 +</DL> 40 +<DL> 41 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 42 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 43 +<TR> 44 +<TD> <A HREF="#-arcradius">-arcradius</A></TD> 45 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD> 46 +</TR> 47 +<TR> 48 +<TD> <A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD> 49 +<TD> <A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD> 50 +</TR> 51 +<TR> 52 +<TD> <A HREF="#-tabbevelsize">-tabbevelsize</A></TD> 53 +<TD> <A HREF="#-tabpady">-tabpady</A></TD> 54 +</TR> 55 +<TR> 56 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD> 57 +</TR> 58 +</TABLE></DD> 59 +</DL> 60 +<DL> 61 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 62 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindtabs"><B>bindtabs</B></A> 63 + <I>event</I> 64 + <I>script</I> 65 +</DD> 66 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 67 + <I>option</I> 68 +</DD> 69 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A> 70 +</DD> 71 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 72 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 73 +</DD> 74 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A> 75 + <I>page</I> 76 + ?<I>destroyframe</I>? 77 +</DD> 78 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A> 79 + <I>page</I> 80 +</DD> 81 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A> 82 + <I>page</I> 83 +</DD> 84 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A> 85 + <I>index</I> 86 + <I>page</I> 87 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 88 +</DD> 89 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A> 90 + <I>page</I> 91 + <I>option</I> 92 +</DD> 93 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A> 94 + <I>page</I> 95 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 96 +</DD> 97 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A> 98 + <I>page</I> 99 + <I>index</I> 100 +</DD> 101 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A> 102 + <I>first</I> 103 + ?<I>last</I>? 104 +</DD> 105 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A> 106 + ?<I>first</I>? 107 + ?<I>last</I>? 108 +</DD> 109 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A> 110 + ?<I>page</I>? 111 +</DD> 112 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A> 113 + <I>page</I> 114 +</DD> 115 +</DL> 116 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 117 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 118 +<P> 119 + 120 +NoteBook widget manage a set of pages and displays one of them. 121 + 122 +</P> 123 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 124 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 125 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-arcradius"><B>-arcradius</B></A></DT> 126 +<DD> 127 + 128 +Specifies the amount of rounding effect at the corners of a tab. This value 129 +can be adjusted from 0 to 8 pixels with the default being 2 pixels. Usually, 130 +small values are preferable. 131 +</DD> 132 +</DL> 133 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 134 +<DD> 135 + 136 +Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default) 137 +then the window will not request any size at all. 138 +In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger 139 +enough to contains the largest page. 140 +</DD> 141 +</DL> 142 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous</B></A></DT> 143 +<DD> 144 + 145 +Specifies wether or not the label of the pages must have the same width. 146 + 147 +</DD> 148 +</DL> 149 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT> 150 +<DD> 151 + 152 +Specifies the side where to place the label of the pages. Must be one 153 +of <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B>. 154 + 155 +</DD> 156 +</DL> 157 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabbevelsize"><B>-tabbevelsize</B></A></DT> 158 +<DD> 159 + 160 +Specifies the amount of bevel the tabs should have. This value can be adjusted from 161 +0 to 8 pixels with the default being 0 pixels. A zero pixel bevel is essentially rectangular 162 +while non-zero bevel size will look trapezoidal. 163 +</DD> 164 +</DL> 165 + 166 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabpady"><B>-tabpady</B></A></DT> 167 +<DD> 168 + Specifies the padding between the text in the tab and the top and bottom 169 + of the tab. Padding may be a list of two values to specify padding for 170 + top and bottom separately. Padding defaults to {0 6}. 171 +</DD> 172 +</DL> 173 + 174 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 175 +<DD> 176 + 177 +Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default) 178 +then the window will not request any size at all. 179 +In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger 180 +enough to contains the largest page. 181 +</DD> 182 +</DL> 183 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 184 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 185 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindtabs"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindtabs</B></A> 186 + <I>event</I> 187 + <I>script</I> 188 +</DT><DD> 189 + 190 +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event 191 +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on a tab. The page identifier on which 192 +the event occurs is appended to the command. 193 + 194 +</DD></DL> 195 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 196 + <I>option</I> 197 +</DT><DD> 198 + 199 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 200 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 201 +</DD></DL> 202 +<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A> 203 +</DT><DD> 204 + 205 +This command can be called to make the NoteBook large enough to contain the largest page. 206 +Note that if all pages use -createcmd, they will have no requested size. 207 + 208 +</DD></DL> 209 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 210 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 211 +</DT><DD> 212 + 213 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 214 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 215 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 216 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 217 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 218 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 219 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 220 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 221 +Read-only options are not be modified. 222 + 223 +</DD></DL> 224 +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A> 225 + <I>page</I> 226 + ?<I>destroyframe</I>? 227 +</DT><DD> 228 + 229 +Deletes the page <I>page</I>. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 1 (the default), the frame 230 +associated to <I>page</I> is destroyed. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 0, the frame is not 231 +destroyed and is reused by further call to <B>insert</B> with the same <I>page</I>. 232 + 233 +</DD></DL> 234 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 235 + <I>page</I> 236 +</DT><DD> 237 + 238 +Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>. 239 + 240 +</DD></DL> 241 +<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A> 242 + <I>page</I> 243 +</DT><DD> 244 + 245 +Return the numerical index corresponding to the item. 246 + 247 +</DD></DL> 248 +<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A> 249 + <I>index</I> 250 + <I>page</I> 251 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 252 +</DT><DD> 253 + 254 +Insert a new page idendified by <I>page</I> at position <I>index</I> in the pages list. 255 +<I>index</I> must be numeric or <B>end</B>. The pathname of the new page is returned. 256 + 257 +<P> 258 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-createcmd"><B>-createcmd</B></A></DT> 259 +<DD> 260 + 261 +Specifies a command to be called the first time the page is raised. 262 + 263 +</DD> 264 +</DL> 265 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT> 266 +<DD> 267 + 268 +Specifies an image to display for the page at the left of the label 269 + 270 +</DD> 271 +</DL> 272 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-leavecmd"><B>-leavecmd</B></A></DT> 273 +<DD> 274 + 275 +Specifies a command to be called when a page is about to be leaved. 276 +The command must return 0 if the page can not be leaved, or 1 if it can. 277 + 278 +</DD> 279 +</DL> 280 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-raisecmd"><B>-raisecmd</B></A></DT> 281 +<DD> 282 + 283 +Specifies a command to be called each time the page is raised. 284 + 285 +</DD> 286 +</DL> 287 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT> 288 +<DD> 289 + 290 +Specifies the state of the page. Must be <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>. 291 + 292 +</DD> 293 +</DL> 294 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT> 295 +<DD> 296 + 297 +Specifies a label to display for the page. 298 + 299 +</DD> 300 +</DL> 301 +</DD></DL> 302 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A> 303 + <I>page</I> 304 + <I>option</I> 305 +</DT><DD> 306 + 307 +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item. 308 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command. 309 + 310 +</DD></DL> 311 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A> 312 + <I>page</I> 313 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 314 +</DT><DD> 315 + 316 +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the 317 +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for 318 +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 319 +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated 320 +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified, 321 +returns a list describing the current options for the item. 322 +Read-only options are not be modified. 323 + 324 +</DD></DL> 325 +<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A> 326 + <I>page</I> 327 + <I>index</I> 328 +</DT><DD> 329 + 330 +Moves <I>page</I> tab to index <I>index</I>. 331 + 332 +</DD></DL> 333 +<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A> 334 + <I>first</I> 335 + ?<I>last</I>? 336 +</DT><DD> 337 + 338 +<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR> 339 +If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if 340 +<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command 341 +returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, 342 +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard 343 +forms for indices. 344 + 345 +</DD></DL> 346 +<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A> 347 + ?<I>first</I>? 348 + ?<I>last</I>? 349 +</DT><DD> 350 + 351 +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages. 352 +If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index 353 +<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. 354 +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements 355 +are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, 356 +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard 357 +forms for indices. 358 + 359 +</DD></DL> 360 +<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A> 361 + ?<I>page</I>? 362 +</DT><DD> 363 + 364 +Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted. 365 + 366 +</DD></DL> 367 +<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A> 368 + <I>page</I> 369 +</DT><DD> 370 + 371 +Scrolls labels to make the label of the page <I>page</I> visible. 372 + 373 +</DD></DL> 374 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PagesManager.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>PagesManager</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>PagesManager</B> 6 + - Pages manager widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PagesManager</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background</A></TR> 17 +</TABLE></DD> 18 +</DL> 19 +<DL> 20 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 21 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 22 +<TR> 23 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR> 25 +</TR> 26 +</TABLE></DD> 27 +</DL> 28 +<DL> 29 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 30 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A> 31 + <I>page</I> 32 +</DD> 33 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 34 + <I>option</I> 35 +</DD> 36 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A> 37 +</DD> 38 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 39 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 40 +</DD> 41 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A> 42 + <I>page</I> 43 +</DD> 44 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A> 45 + <I>page</I> 46 +</DD> 47 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A> 48 + <I>first</I> 49 + ?<I>last</I>? 50 +</DD> 51 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A> 52 + ?<I>first</I>? 53 + ?<I>last</I>? 54 +</DD> 55 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A> 56 + ?<I>page</I>? 57 +</DD> 58 +</DL> 59 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 60 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 61 +<P> 62 + 63 +PagesManager widget manages a set of pages and displays one of them. 64 +PagesManager does not provide any user access method, as NoteBook 65 +does, so it can be done through a listbox, a menu, radiobutton, or 66 +whatever. The widget shows no pages during creation; there must be an 67 +explicit call to <B>raise</B> to display one. 68 + 69 +</P> 70 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 71 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 72 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 73 +<DD> 74 + 75 +Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default) 76 +then the window will not request any size at all. 77 +In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager 78 +larger enough to contains the largest page. 79 +</DD> 80 +</DL> 81 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 82 +<DD> 83 + 84 +Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default) 85 +then the window will not request any size at all. 86 +In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager 87 +larger enough to contains the largest page. 88 +</DD> 89 +</DL> 90 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 91 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 92 +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> 93 + <I>page</I> 94 +</DT><DD> 95 + 96 +Add a new page identified by <I>page</I>, which is an arbitrary 97 +identifier. The pathname of the new page is returned and widgets for 98 +the page should be created with this as the parent or ancestor. 99 +However, PagesManager manages its own geometry. <B>pack</B>, 100 +<B>grid</B> or an equivalent should not be used with the pathname 101 +returned by <B>add</B>. 102 + 103 +</DD></DL> 104 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 105 + <I>option</I> 106 +</DT><DD> 107 + 108 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 109 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 110 +</DD></DL> 111 +<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A> 112 +</DT><DD> 113 + 114 +This command can be called to make the PagesManager large enough to contain the largest page. 115 + 116 +</DD></DL> 117 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 118 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 119 +</DT><DD> 120 + 121 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 122 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 123 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 124 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 125 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 126 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 127 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 128 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 129 +Read-only options are not be modified. 130 + 131 +</DD></DL> 132 +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A> 133 + <I>page</I> 134 +</DT><DD> 135 + 136 +Deletes the page <I>page</I>. 137 + 138 +</DD></DL> 139 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 140 + <I>page</I> 141 +</DT><DD> 142 + 143 +Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>. 144 + 145 +</DD></DL> 146 +<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A> 147 + <I>first</I> 148 + ?<I>last</I>? 149 +</DT><DD> 150 + 151 +<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR> 152 +If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if 153 +<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command 154 +returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, 155 +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard 156 +forms for indices. 157 + 158 +</DD></DL> 159 +<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A> 160 + ?<I>first</I>? 161 + ?<I>last</I>? 162 +</DT><DD> 163 + 164 +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages. 165 +If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index 166 +<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. 167 +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements 168 +are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, 169 +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard 170 +forms for indices. 171 + 172 +</DD></DL> 173 +<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A> 174 + ?<I>page</I>? 175 +</DT><DD> 176 + 177 +Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted. 178 + 179 +</DD></DL> 180 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PanedWindow.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>PanedWindow</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>PanedWindow</B> 6 + - Tiled layout manager widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanedWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +</TABLE></DD> 18 +</DL> 19 +<DL> 20 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 21 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 22 +<TR> 23 +<TD> <A HREF="#-activator">-activator</A></TD> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TD> 25 +</TR> 26 +<TR> 27 +<TD> <A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD> 28 +<TD> <A HREF="#-weights">-weights</A></TD> 29 +</TR> 30 +<TR> 31 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD> 32 +</TR> 33 +</TABLE></DD> 34 +</DL> 35 +<DL> 36 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 37 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A> 38 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 39 +</DD> 40 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 41 + <I>option</I> 42 +</DD> 43 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 44 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 45 +</DD> 46 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A> 47 + <I>index</I> 48 +</DD> 49 +</DL> 50 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 51 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 52 +<P> 53 + 54 +PanedWindow is a widget that lays out children in 55 +a vertically or horizontally tiled format. 56 +The user can adjust the size of the panes, with a pane control sash created 57 +between children. 58 +</P> 59 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 60 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 61 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-activator"><B>-activator (read-only)</B></A></DT> 62 +<DD> 63 + 64 +By default, the control sash is either a button or a line depending 65 +upon the underlying operating system. This sash may be explicitly set 66 +using this option. If set to <B>line</B> then the sash consists of 67 +just a dividing line. Otherwise if set to <B>button</B> then it 68 +constists of a knob that can be dragged. 69 + 70 +</DD> 71 +</DL> 72 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad (read-only)</B></A></DT> 73 +<DD> 74 + 75 +Specifies additional space between the button of the sash and children. 76 + 77 +</DD> 78 +</DL> 79 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT> 80 +<DD> 81 + 82 +Specifies the side of the sash, which implies the layout: <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B> 83 +(horizontal layout), <B>left</B> or <B>right</B> (vertical layout). 84 +</DD> 85 +</DL> 86 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-weights"><B>-weights (read-only)</B></A></DT> 87 +<DD> 88 + 89 +Specifies how the weights specified when adding panes should be used. Must be 90 +<B>extra</B> or <B>available</B>. When using <I>extra</I>, only extra space is 91 +devided among the diffferent panes relative to their weight. When using 92 +<I>available</I>, all space is devided among the diffferent panes relative to 93 +their weight. Default value for <B>weights</B> is <I>extra</I>. 94 + 95 +</DD> 96 +</DL> 97 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width (read-only)</B></A></DT> 98 +<DD> 99 + 100 +Specifies the width of the button of the sash. This option is ignored 101 +if the activator is set to <B>line</B>. 102 + 103 +</DD> 104 +</DL> 105 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 106 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 107 +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> 108 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 109 +</DT><DD> 110 + 111 +This command add a new pane. The new pane is placed below the previous pane for 112 +vertical layout or at right for horizontal layout. This command returns a frame 113 +where user can place its widget. Valid options are: 114 +<P> 115 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-minsize"><B>-minsize</B></A></DT> 116 +<DD> 117 + 118 +Specifies the minimum size requested for the pane. 119 +See the <B>grid</B> command for more information. 120 +</DD> 121 +</DL> 122 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-weight"><B>-weight</B></A></DT> 123 +<DD> 124 + 125 +Specifies the relative weight for apportioning any extra spaces among panes. 126 +See the <B>grid</B> command for more information. 127 +</DD> 128 +</DL> 129 +</DD></DL> 130 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 131 + <I>option</I> 132 +</DT><DD> 133 + 134 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 135 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 136 +</DD></DL> 137 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 138 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 139 +</DT><DD> 140 + 141 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 142 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 143 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 144 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 145 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 146 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 147 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 148 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 149 +Read-only options are not be modified. 150 + 151 +</DD></DL> 152 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 153 + <I>index</I> 154 +</DT><DD> 155 + 156 +Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added pane. 157 +</DD></DL> 158 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PanelFrame.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>PanelFrame</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>PanelFrame</B> 6 + - Frame with a boxed title area 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD> 26 +</TR> 27 +</TABLE></DD> 28 +</DL> 29 +<DL> 30 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 31 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="#-panelbackground">-panelbackground</A></TD> 38 +<TD> <A HREF="#-panelforeground">-panelforeground</A></TR> 39 +</TR> 40 +<TR> 41 +<TD> <A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR> 42 +</TR> 43 +</TABLE></DD> 44 +</DL> 45 +<DL> 46 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 47 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 48 + <I>option</I> 49 +</DD> 50 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 51 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 52 +</DD> 53 +</DL> 54 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 55 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 56 + 57 +<P> 58 +PanelFrame creates a frame area with a boxed title area. The boxed title 59 +area contains a label ands allows for other items to be placed in it. This 60 +can serve like a mini-toolbar. 61 +</P> 62 + 63 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 64 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 65 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 66 +<DD> 67 +Specifies the desired height for the widget. 68 +</DD> 69 +<DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT> 70 +<DD> 71 +The spacing to place around individual panel area items. 72 +</DD> 73 +<DT><A NAME="-panelbackground"><B>-panelbackground</B></A></DT> 74 +<DD> 75 +The color for the panel area background. 76 +Defaults to the selection highlight background color. 77 +</DD> 78 +<DT><A NAME="-panelforeground"><B>-panelforeground</B></A></DT> 79 +<DD> 80 +The color for the title text. 81 +Defaults to the selection highlight foreground color. 82 +</DD> 83 +<DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 84 +<DD> 85 +Specifies the desired width for the widget. 86 +</DD> 87 +</DL> 88 + 89 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 90 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 91 +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B> 92 + ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 93 +</DT><DD> 94 +Add a widget to the panel. Widgets are <B>pack</B>ed in. 95 +Possible options are: 96 +<DL> 97 +<DT><B>-side</B></DT> 98 +<DD>Side to place item on (defaults to <B>right</B>).</DD> 99 +<DT><B>-fill</B></DT> 100 +<DD>Whether to fill space (defaults to <B>none</B>).</DD> 101 +<DT><B>-expand</B></DT> 102 +<DD>Whether to expand space (defaults to <B>0</B>).</DD> 103 +<DT><B>-pad</B></DT> 104 +<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD> 105 +</DL> 106 +</DD> 107 +</DL> 108 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 109 + <I>option</I> 110 +</DT><DD> 111 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 112 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 113 +</DD> 114 +</DL> 115 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 116 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 117 +</DT><DD> 118 + 119 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no 120 +<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available 121 +options for <I>pathName</I>. If <I>option</I> is specified with no 122 +<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named 123 +<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of 124 +the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more 125 +<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the 126 +given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command 127 +returns an empty string. 128 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 129 +Read-only options are not be modified. 130 +</DD> 131 +</DL> 132 +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A> 133 +<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...? 134 +</DT><DD> 135 +Delete a widget and associated state from the panel.</DD> 136 +</DL> 137 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 138 +</DT><DD> 139 +Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be 140 +created.</DD> 141 +</DD> 142 +</DL> 143 +<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A> 144 +</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD> 145 +<DL> 146 +<DL><DT><A NAME="remove"><I>pathName</I> <B>remove</B></A> 147 +<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...? 148 +</DT><DD> 149 +Remove a widget item and associated state from the panel without destroying 150 +the item.</DD> 151 +</DL> 152 + 153 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PasswdDlg.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>PasswdDlg</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>PasswdDlg</B> 6 + - Login/Password dialog box 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PasswdDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> -anchor</TD> 17 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> -homogeneous</TD> 21 +<TD> -modal</TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> -padx</TD> 25 +<TD> -pady</TD> 26 +</TR> 27 +<TR> 28 +<TD> -parent</TD> 29 +<TD> -spacing</TD> 30 +</TR> 31 +<TR> 32 +<TD> -title</TD> 33 +</TABLE></DD> 34 +</DL> 35 +<DL> 36 +<DT><I><A HREF="LabelEntry.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelEntry</B></A></I></DT> 37 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 38 +<TR> 39 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 40 +<TD> -borderwidth or -bd</TD> 41 +</TR> 42 +<TR> 43 +<TD> -disabledforeground</TD> 44 +<TD> -entrybg</TD> 45 +</TR> 46 +<TR> 47 +<TD> -entryfg</TD> 48 +<TD> -exportselection</TD> 49 +</TR> 50 +<TR> 51 +<TD> -font</TD> 52 +<TD> -foreground or -fg</TD> 53 +</TR> 54 +<TR> 55 +<TD> -helptype</TD> 56 +<TD> -highlightbackground</TD> 57 +</TR> 58 +<TR> 59 +<TD> -highlightcolor</TD> 60 +<TD> -highlightthickness</TD> 61 +</TR> 62 +<TR> 63 +<TD> -insertbackground</TD> 64 +<TD> -insertborderwidth</TD> 65 +</TR> 66 +<TR> 67 +<TD> -insertofftime</TD> 68 +<TD> -insertontime</TD> 69 +</TR> 70 +<TR> 71 +<TD> -insertwidth</TD> 72 +<TD> -labelanchor</TD> 73 +</TR> 74 +<TR> 75 +<TD> -labelfont</TD> 76 +<TD> -labelheight</TD> 77 +</TR> 78 +<TR> 79 +<TD> -labeljustify</TD> 80 +<TD> -labelwidth</TD> 81 +</TR> 82 +<TR> 83 +<TD> -loginhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD> 84 +<TD> -loginhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD> 85 +</TR> 86 +<TR> 87 +<TD> -loginlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD> 88 +<TD> -logintext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD> 89 +</TR> 90 +<TR> 91 +<TD> -logintextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD> 92 +<TD> -loginunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD> 93 +</TR> 94 +<TR> 95 +<TD> -passwdeditable (see <B>-editable</B>)</TD> 96 +<TD> -passwdhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD> 97 +</TR> 98 +<TR> 99 +<TD> -passwdhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD> 100 +<TD> -passwdlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD> 101 +</TR> 102 +<TR> 103 +<TD> -passwdstate (see <B>-state</B>)</TD> 104 +<TD> -passwdtext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD> 105 +</TR> 106 +<TR> 107 +<TD> -passwdtextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD> 108 +<TD> -passwdunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD> 109 +</TR> 110 +<TR> 111 +<TD> -relief</TD> 112 +<TD> -selectbackground</TD> 113 +</TR> 114 +<TR> 115 +<TD> -selectborderwidth</TD> 116 +<TD> -selectforeground</TD> 117 +</TR> 118 +<TR> 119 +<TD> -wraplength</TD> 120 +</TABLE></DD> 121 +</DL> 122 +<DL> 123 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 124 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 125 +<TR> 126 +<TD> <A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR> 127 +<TD> <A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR> 128 +</TR> 129 +</TABLE></DD> 130 +</DL> 131 +<DL> 132 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 133 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 134 + <I>option</I> 135 +</DD> 136 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 137 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 138 +</DD> 139 +</DL> 140 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 141 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 142 +<P> 143 + 144 +PasswdDlg provides a simple way to display a login/password dialog. 145 +PasswdDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, and return the value of login 146 +and password in a list, or an empty list if it is destroyed or user press cancel. 147 +When returning, the dialog no longer exists. 148 +<BR>Additionnal resources can be set to modify other text: 149 +<PRE> 150 + *loginName Label for login LabelEntry 151 + *passwordName Label for password LabelEntry 152 +</PRE> 153 + 154 +</P> 155 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 156 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 157 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT> 158 +<DD> 159 + 160 +Specifies a command to call when user press ok button. 161 + 162 +</DD> 163 +</DL> 164 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT> 165 +<DD> 166 + 167 +Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible: 168 +<DD> 169 +<P> 170 +<DL COMPACT> 171 +<DT> 172 +<B>ok</B> 173 +<DD> 174 +Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P> 175 +<DT> 176 +<B>okcancel</B> 177 +<DD> 178 +Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P> 179 +</DL COMPACT> 180 + 181 +</DD> 182 +</DL> 183 + 184 +</DD> 185 +</DL> 186 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 187 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 188 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 189 + <I>option</I> 190 +</DT><DD> 191 + 192 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 193 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 194 +</DD></DL> 195 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 196 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 197 +</DT><DD> 198 + 199 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 200 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 201 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 202 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 203 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 204 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 205 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 206 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 207 +Read-only options are not be modified. 208 + 209 +</DD></DL> 210 +<HR> 211 + 212 +<ADRESS>Stephane Lavirotte <A HREF="mailto:Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr">(Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr)</A></ADRESS> 213 + 214 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ProgressBar.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressBar</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>ProgressBar</B> 6 + - Progress indicator widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR> 26 +</TR> 27 +</TABLE></DD> 28 +</DL> 29 +<DL> 30 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 31 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="#-maximum">-maximum</A></TR> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR> 38 +<TD> <A HREF="#-variable">-variable</A></TR> 39 +</TR> 40 +<TR> 41 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR> 42 +</TABLE></DD> 43 +</DL> 44 +<DL> 45 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 46 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 47 + <I>option</I> 48 +</DD> 49 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 50 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 51 +</DD> 52 +</DL> 53 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 54 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 55 +<P> 56 + 57 +ProgressBar widget indicates the user the progress of a lengthly operation. 58 +It is used by <A HREF="MainFrame.html">MainFrame</A> 59 +and <A HREF="ProgressDlg.html">ProgressDlg</A>. 60 +</P> 61 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 62 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 63 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 64 +<DD> 65 + 66 +Specifies the desired height for the progress indicator. 67 +</DD> 68 +</DL> 69 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-maximum"><B>-maximum</B></A></DT> 70 +<DD> 71 + 72 +Specifies the maximum value of the variable. This value must be 73 +greater than zero. 74 + 75 +</DD> 76 +</DL> 77 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT> 78 +<DD> 79 + 80 +Specifies the type of the ProgressBar. Must be one of <B>normal</B>, 81 +<B>incremental</B>, <B>infinite</B> or <B>nonincremental_infinite</B>. 82 + 83 +<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>, the progress indicator is drawn 84 +proportional to the variable value and <B>maximum</B> option each time the 85 +variable is set. 86 + 87 +<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>incremental</I>, the value of the progress 88 +indicator is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is 89 +set by its value. The progress indicator is drawn proportional to the internal 90 +value and 91 +<B>maximum</B> option. 92 + 93 +<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>infinite</I>, the value of the progress indicator 94 +is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is set by its 95 +value. The progress indicator moves from left to right if internal value 96 +(modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than <B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left 97 +if internal value is greater than <B>maximum</B>/2. 98 + 99 +<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>nonincremental_infinite</I>, the value of the 100 +progress indicator taken from the variable value, The progress indicator moves 101 +from left to right if variable value (modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than 102 +<B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left if internal value is greater than 103 +<B>maximum</B>/2. 104 + 105 +<BR><BR>See <B>-variable</B> option for special case of its value, 106 + 107 +<BR><BR>Default value for <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>. 108 + 109 +</DD> 110 +</DL> 111 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT> 112 +<DD> 113 + 114 +Specifies the variable attached to the progress indicator. Progress indicator 115 +is updated when the value of the variable changes. If the value of the 116 +variable is negative, the progress indicator is not displayed (it is drawn flat 117 +with <B>background</B> color - usefull for ProgressDlg to make it 118 +invisible). If its value 0, progress indicator is reinitialized. 119 + 120 +</DD> 121 +</DL> 122 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 123 +<DD> 124 + 125 +Specifies the desired width for the progress indicator. 126 +</DD> 127 +</DL> 128 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 129 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 130 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 131 + <I>option</I> 132 +</DT><DD> 133 + 134 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 135 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 136 +</DD></DL> 137 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 138 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 139 +</DT><DD> 140 + 141 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 142 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 143 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 144 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 145 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 146 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 147 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 148 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 149 +Read-only options are not be modified. 150 + 151 +</DD></DL> 152 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ProgressDlg.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressDlg</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>ProgressDlg</B> 6 + - Progress indicator dialog box 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR> 18 +</TR> 19 +</TABLE></DD> 20 +</DL> 21 +<DL> 22 +<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT> 23 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 24 +<TR> 25 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 26 +<TD> -parent</TD> 27 +</TR> 28 +<TR> 29 +<TD> -separator</TD> 30 +<TD> -title</TD> 31 +</TR> 32 +</TABLE></DD> 33 +</DL> 34 +<DL> 35 +<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT> 36 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 37 +<TR> 38 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 39 +<TD> -borderwidth or -bd</TD> 40 +</TR> 41 +<TR> 42 +<TD> -foreground or -fg</TD> 43 +<TD> -maximum</TD> 44 +</TR> 45 +<TR> 46 +<TD> -relief</TD> 47 +<TD> -troughcolor</TD> 48 +</TR> 49 +<TR> 50 +<TD> -type</TD> 51 +<TD> -variable</TD> 52 +</TR> 53 +</TABLE></DD> 54 +</DL> 55 +<DL> 56 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 57 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 58 +<TR> 59 +<TD> <A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR> 60 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR> 61 +</TR> 62 +<TR> 63 +<TD> <A HREF="#-stop">-stop</A></TR> 64 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR> 65 +</TR> 66 +</TABLE></DD> 67 +</DL> 68 +<DL> 69 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 70 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 71 + <I>option</I> 72 +</DD> 73 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 74 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 75 +</DD> 76 +</DL> 77 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 78 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 79 +<P> 80 + 81 +ProgressDlg provides a simple way to display a progress indicator dialog. 82 +ProgressDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, set a local 83 +grab to it and immediatly return. The dialog is updated by modifying the 84 +value of the variable of options <B>-textvariable</B> and <B>-variable</B>. 85 +You have to destroy the dialog after use. 86 + 87 +</P> 88 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 89 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 90 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT> 91 +<DD> 92 + 93 +Specifies a command to call when user press stop button. Note that it 94 +is the program's responsibility to periodically call <B>update</B> so 95 +that button press events can be generated. 96 + 97 +</DD> 98 +</DL> 99 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 100 +<DD> 101 + 102 +Specifies a desired height for the label in lines of text. 103 + 104 +</DD> 105 +</DL> 106 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-stop"><B>-stop</B></A></DT> 107 +<DD> 108 + 109 +Specifies the text of the button typically used to stop process. If empty, no button will 110 +be drawn. This can be a symbolic name. 111 + 112 +</DD> 113 +</DL> 114 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 115 +<DD> 116 + 117 +Specifies a desired width for the label in characters. 118 + 119 +</DD> 120 +</DL> 121 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 122 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 123 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 124 + <I>option</I> 125 +</DT><DD> 126 + 127 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 128 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 129 +</DD></DL> 130 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 131 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 132 +</DT><DD> 133 + 134 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 135 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 136 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 137 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 138 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 139 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 140 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 141 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 142 +Read-only options are not be modified. 143 + 144 +</DD></DL> 145 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ScrollView.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollView</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>ScrollView</B> 6 + - Display the visible area of a scrolled window 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollView</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR> 22 +</TR> 23 +</TABLE></DD> 24 +</DL> 25 +<DL> 26 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 27 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 28 +<TR> 29 +<TD> <A HREF="#-fill">-fill</A></TR> 30 +<TD> <A HREF="#-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 31 +</TR> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="#-window">-window</A></TR> 38 +</TABLE></DD> 39 +</DL> 40 +<DL> 41 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 42 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 43 + <I>option</I> 44 +</DD> 45 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 46 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 47 +</DD> 48 +</DL> 49 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 50 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 51 +<P> 52 + 53 +ScrollView displays the visible area of a scrolled window within 54 +its scroll region. 55 + 56 +</P> 57 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 58 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 59 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT> 60 +<DD> 61 + 62 +Specifies the fill color of the rectangle. 63 + 64 +</DD> 65 +</DL> 66 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-foreground"><B>-foreground</B></A></DT> 67 +<DD> 68 + 69 +Specifies the color of the border of the rectangle. 70 + 71 +</DD> 72 +</DL> 73 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 74 +<DD> 75 + 76 +Specifies the desired height for the ScrollView. 77 +</DD> 78 +</DL> 79 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 80 +<DD> 81 + 82 +Specifies the desired width for the ScrollView. 83 +</DD> 84 +</DL> 85 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT> 86 +<DD> 87 + 88 +Specifies the window to view. This widget must have <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and 89 +<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options, and respond to <B>xview</B> and <B>yview</B> command. 90 +In order to make ScrollView working with other scrollbar, <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and 91 +<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options of the widget must be set before the widget is passed to 92 +the <B>-window</B> option of the ScrollView (for example, if the widget is handled by 93 +a ScrolledWindow, call <B>setwidget</B> before setting <B>-window</B> option). 94 + 95 +</DD> 96 +</DL> 97 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 98 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 99 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 100 + <I>option</I> 101 +</DT><DD> 102 + 103 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 104 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 105 +</DD></DL> 106 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 107 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 108 +</DT><DD> 109 + 110 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 111 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 112 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 113 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 114 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 115 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 116 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 117 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 118 +Read-only options are not be modified. 119 + 120 +</DD></DL> 121 +<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR> 122 + 123 +<DL><DT>If mouse button 1 is pressed and dragged over the ScrollView, the top left corner of 124 +the visible area of the scrolled window is moved proportionally to the mouse displacement. 125 +</DT></DL> 126 +<DL><DT>If mouse button 3 is pressed over the ScrollView, the top left corner of the visible 127 +area is proportionally set to this point. 128 +</DT></DL> 129 + 130 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ScrollableFrame.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollableFrame</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>ScrollableFrame</B> 6 + - Scrollable frame containing widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollableFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD></TR> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD></TR> 21 +</TABLE></DD> 22 +<BR> 23 +Themed widget (<B>Widget::theme true</B>): Options <B>-background</B> and <B>-bg</B> are not available. 24 +Modify style <B>TFrame</B> property <B>-background</B> instead. 25 +</DL> 26 +<DL> 27 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 28 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 29 +<TR> 30 +<TD> <A HREF="#-areaheight">-areaheight</A></TR> 31 +<TD> <A HREF="#-areawidth">-areawidth</A></TR> 32 +</TR> 33 +<TR> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="#-constrainedheight">-constrainedheight</A></TR> 35 +<TD> <A HREF="#-constrainedwidth">-constrainedwidth</A></TR> 36 +</TR> 37 +<TR> 38 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR> 39 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR> 40 +</TR> 41 +<TR> 42 +<TD> <A HREF="#-xscrollincrement">-xscrollincrement</A></TR> 43 +<TD> <A HREF="#-yscrollincrement">-yscrollincrement</A></TR> 44 +</TR> 45 +</TABLE></DD> 46 +</DL> 47 +<DL> 48 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 49 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 50 + <I>option</I> 51 +</DD> 52 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 53 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 54 +</DD> 55 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A> 56 +</DD> 57 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A> 58 + <I>widget</I> 59 + ?<I>vert</I>? 60 + ?<I>horz</I>? 61 +</DD> 62 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A> 63 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 64 +</DD> 65 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A> 66 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 67 +</DD> 68 +</DL> 69 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 70 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 71 +<P> 72 + 73 +ScrollableFrame widget containing widget. 74 + 75 +</P> 76 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 77 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 78 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-areaheight"><B>-areaheight</B></A></DT> 79 +<DD> 80 + 81 +Specifies the height for the scrollable area. If zero, then the height 82 +of the scrollable area is made just large enough to hold all its children. 83 +</DD> 84 +</DL> 85 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-areawidth"><B>-areawidth</B></A></DT> 86 +<DD> 87 + 88 +Specifies the width for the scrollable area. If zero, then the width 89 +of the scrollable area window is made just large enough to hold all its children. 90 +</DD> 91 +</DL> 92 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedheight"><B>-constrainedheight</B></A></DT> 93 +<DD> 94 + 95 +Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same height of the 96 +scrolled window. If true, vertical scrollbar is not needed. 97 + 98 +</DD> 99 +</DL> 100 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedwidth"><B>-constrainedwidth</B></A></DT> 101 +<DD> 102 + 103 +Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same width of the 104 +scrolled window. If true, horizontal scrollbar is not needed. 105 + 106 +</DD> 107 +</DL> 108 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 109 +<DD> 110 + 111 +Specifies the desired height for the window in pixels. 112 + 113 +</DD> 114 +</DL> 115 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 116 +<DD> 117 + 118 +Specifies the desired width for the window in pixels. 119 + 120 +</DD> 121 +</DL> 122 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-xscrollincrement"><B>-xscrollincrement</B></A></DT> 123 +<DD> 124 + 125 +See <B>xscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget. 126 + 127 +</DD> 128 +</DL> 129 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-yscrollincrement"><B>-yscrollincrement</B></A></DT> 130 +<DD> 131 + 132 +See <B>yscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget. 133 + 134 +</DD> 135 +</DL> 136 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 137 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 138 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 139 + <I>option</I> 140 +</DT><DD> 141 + 142 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 143 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 144 +</DD></DL> 145 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 146 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 147 +</DT><DD> 148 + 149 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 150 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 151 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 152 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 153 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 154 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 155 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 156 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 157 +Read-only options are not be modified. 158 + 159 +</DD></DL> 160 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 161 +</DT><DD> 162 + 163 +Return the pathname of the scrolled frame where widget should be created. 164 + 165 +</DD></DL> 166 +<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A> 167 + <I>widget</I> 168 + ?<I>vert</I>? 169 + ?<I>horz</I>? 170 +</DT><DD> 171 + 172 +Arrange scrollable area to make <I>widget</I> visible in the window. 173 +<I>vert</I> and <I>horz</I> specify which part of <I>widget</I> must be preferably 174 +visible, in case where <I>widget</I> is too tall or too large to be entirely visible. 175 +<I>vert</I> must be <B>top</B> (the default) or <B>bottom</B>, 176 +and <I>horz</I> must be <B>left</B> (the default) or <B>right</B>. 177 +If <I>vert</I> or <I>horz</I> is not a valid value, area is not scrolled in this direction. 178 + 179 +</DD></DL> 180 +<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A> 181 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 182 +</DT><DD> 183 + 184 +Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>. 185 + 186 +</DD></DL> 187 +<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A> 188 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 189 +</DT><DD> 190 + 191 +Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>. 192 + 193 +</DD></DL> 194 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ScrolledWindow.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>ScrolledWindow</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>ScrolledWindow</B> 6 + - Generic scrolled widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrolledWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT> 15 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 16 +<TR> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 18 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 19 +</TR> 20 +<TR> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR> 22 +</TABLE></DD> 23 +<DT><I>Themed</I></DT> 24 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 25 +<TR> 26 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 27 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD> 28 +</TR> 29 +<TR> 30 +<TD> (<B>-bg</B> has no effect)</TD> 31 +</TR> 32 +</TABLE></DD> 33 +</DL> 34 +<DL> 35 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 36 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 37 +<TR> 38 +<TD> <A HREF="#-auto">-auto</A></TR> 39 +<TD> <A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR> 40 +<TD> <A HREF="#-managed">-managed</A></TR> 41 +<TD> <A HREF="#-scrollbar">-scrollbar</A></TR> 42 +<TD> <A HREF="#-sides">-sides</A></TR> 43 +<TD> <A HREF="#-size">-size</A></TR> 44 +</TR> 45 +</TABLE></DD> 46 +</DL> 47 +<DL> 48 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 49 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 50 + <I>option</I> 51 +</DD> 52 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 53 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 54 +</DD> 55 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A> 56 +</DD> 57 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setwidget"><B>setwidget</B></A> 58 + <I>widget</I> 59 +</DD> 60 +</DL> 61 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 62 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 63 +<P> 64 + 65 +ScrolledWindow enables user to create easily a widget with its scrollbar. 66 +Scrollbars are created by ScrolledWindow and scroll commands are automatically associated to 67 +a scrollable widget with <B>ScrolledWindow::setwidget</B>. 68 +</P> 69 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 70 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 71 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-auto"><B>-auto</B></A></DT> 72 +<DD> 73 + 74 +Specifies the desired auto managed scrollbar: 75 +<LI><B>none</B> means scrollbar are always drawn 76 +<LI><B>horizontal</B> means horizontal scrollbar is drawn as needed 77 +<LI><B>vertical</B> means vertical scrollbar is drawn as needed 78 +<LI><B>both</B> means horizontal and vertical scrollbars are drawn as needed (default value) 79 +</DD> 80 +</DL> 81 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad (read-only)</B></A></DT> 82 +<DD> 83 + 84 +Padding in pixels between client widget and scrollbars. 85 +Default value: <B>1</B>. 86 +</DD> 87 +</DL> 88 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-managed"><B>-managed (read-only)</B></A></DT> 89 +<DD> 90 + 91 +If true, scrollbar are managed during creation, so their size are included in the requested size of the 92 +ScrolledWindow. If false, they are not. 93 +Default value: <B>true</B>. 94 +</DD> 95 +</DL> 96 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-scrollbar"><B>-scrollbar</B></A></DT> 97 +<DD> 98 + 99 +Specifies the desired scrollbar: <B>none</B>, <B>horizontal</B>, <B>vertical</B> 100 +or <B>both</B> (default value). 101 +</DD> 102 +</DL> 103 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-sides"><B>-sides (read-only)</B></A></DT> 104 +<DD> 105 + 106 +Side of the scrollbars. 107 +Possible values are: <B>ne</B>, <B>en</B>, <B>nw</B>, <B>wn</B>, <B>se</B> (default value), <B>es</B>, <B>sw</B>, <B>ws</B>. 108 +</DD> 109 +</DL> 110 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-size"><B>-size (read-only)</B></A></DT> 111 +<DD> 112 + 113 +Size of the scrollbars in pixels. 114 +Use </B>0</B> for standard size (default value).<BR> 115 +This option has no effect if widget is <I>themed</I>. 116 +</DD> 117 +</DL> 118 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 119 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 120 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 121 + <I>option</I> 122 +</DT><DD> 123 + 124 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 125 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 126 +</DD></DL> 127 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 128 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 129 +</DT><DD> 130 + 131 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 132 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 133 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 134 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 135 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 136 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 137 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 138 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 139 +Read-only options are not be modified. 140 + 141 +</DD></DL> 142 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 143 +</DT><DD> 144 + 145 +Return the pathname of the frame where the scrolled widget should be created. This command 146 +is no longer needed. You can directly create the scrolled widget as the child 147 +of <I>pathName</I>. 148 +</DD></DL> 149 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setwidget"><I>pathName</I> <B>setwidget</B></A> 150 + <I>widget</I> 151 +</DT><DD> 152 + 153 +Associate <I>widget</I> to the the scrollbars. <I>widget</I> becomes 154 +managed by the ScrolledWindow. The user should not attempt to manage 155 +<I>widget</I> until it is no longer managed by the ScrolledWindow. 156 +<I>widget</I> must be a scrollable widget, i.e. have the options 157 +<B>xscrollcommand</B>/<B>yscrollcommand</B> and the command <B>xview</B>/<B>yview</B>, 158 +such as canvas or text. 159 +</DD></DL> 160 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/SelectColor.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>SelectColor</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>SelectColor</B> 6 + - Color selection widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectColor</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="#-color">-color</A></td> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></td> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="#-placement">-placement</A></td> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="#-title">-title</A></td> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="#-type">-type</A></td> 25 +</TR> 26 +</TABLE></DD> 27 +</DL> 28 +<DL> 29 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 30 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 31 + <I>option</I> 32 +</DD> 33 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 34 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 35 +</DD> 36 +<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#dialog"><B>dialog</B></A> 37 + <I>pathName</I> 38 + <I>?option value ...?</I> 39 +</DD> 40 +<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#menu"><B>menu</B></A> 41 + <I>pathName</I> 42 + <I>placement</I> 43 + <I>?option value ...?</I> 44 +</DD> 45 +<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#setcolor"><B>setcolor</B></A> 46 + <I>index</I> 47 + <I>color</I> 48 +</DD> 49 +</DL> 50 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 51 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 52 +<P> 53 + 54 +SelectColor provides a simple way to select color. It can be displayed 55 +as a dialog box or as a menubutton. 56 + 57 +</P> 58 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 59 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 60 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-color"><B>-color</B></A></DT> 61 +<DD> 62 + 63 +Specifies the color value of the widget. 64 + 65 +</DD> 66 +</DL> 67 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT> 68 +<DD> 69 + 70 +Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in 71 +root window. 72 +</DD> 73 +</DL> 74 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-placement"><B>-placement</B></A></DT> 75 +<DD> 76 + 77 +Where to place the <i>popup</i> color dialog when displaying it. 78 +Must be any of: <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>, 79 +<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>. If <i>-parent</i> is specified, 80 +placement will be in relation to the parent widget. 81 +</DD> 82 +</DL> 83 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT> 84 +<DD> 85 + 86 +Title of the Dialog toplevel. 87 + 88 +</DD> 89 +</DL> 90 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type (read-only)</B></A></DT> 91 +<DD> 92 + 93 +Specifies the type of the SelectColor widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or 94 +<B>popup</B>. <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>, 95 +SelectColor::<B>create</B> directly creates the dialog, displays it and 96 +return an empty string if cancel button is pressed or if dialog is destroyed, 97 +and the selected color if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog is 98 +destroyed. <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>popup</I>, 99 +SelectColor::<B>create</B> creates a small, popup dialog with a small set of 100 +predefined colors and a button to activate a full color dialog. 101 + 102 +</DD> 103 +</DL> 104 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 105 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 106 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 107 + <I>option</I> 108 +</DT><DD> 109 + 110 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 111 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 112 +</DD></DL> 113 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 114 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 115 +</DT><DD> 116 + 117 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 118 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 119 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 120 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 121 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 122 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 123 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 124 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 125 +Read-only options are not be modified. 126 + 127 +</DD></DL> 128 +<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>dialog</B></A> 129 + <I>pathName</I> 130 + <I>?option value ...?</I> 131 +</DT><DD> 132 + 133 +Creates a dialog for the user to select a custom color. 134 + 135 +</DD></DL> 136 + 137 +<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>menu</B></A> 138 + <I>pathName</I> 139 + <I>placement</I> 140 + <I>?option value ...?</I> 141 +</DT><DD> 142 + 143 +Creates a small, popup dialog for the user to select from a predefined list 144 +of colors with an additional button to display a full color dialog. 145 + 146 +<p> 147 +<i>placement</i> can be any of <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>, 148 +<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>. If <i>-parent</i> is specified, 149 +placement will be in relation to the parent widget. 150 +</p> 151 + 152 +</DD></DL> 153 + 154 +</DD></DL> 155 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setcolor">SelectColor::<B>setcolor</B></A> 156 + <I>index</I> 157 + <I>color</I> 158 +</DT><DD> 159 + 160 +Set the value of user predefined color at index <I>index</I> to <I>color</I>. 161 +<I>index</I> must be between 0 and 10. 162 + 163 +</DD></DL> 164 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/SelectFont.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>SelectFont</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>SelectFont</B> 6 + - Font selection widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectFont</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR> 18 +</TR> 19 +</TABLE></DD> 20 +</DL> 21 +<DL> 22 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 23 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 24 +<TR> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR> 26 +<TD> <A HREF="#-initialcolor">-initialcolor</A></TR> 27 +</TR> 28 +<TR> 29 +<TD> <A HREF="#-nosizes">-nosizes</A></TR> 30 +<TD> <A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR> 31 +</TR> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="#-sampletext">-sampletext</A></TR> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR> 38 +</TABLE></DD> 39 +</DL> 40 +<DL> 41 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 42 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 43 + <I>option</I> 44 +</DD> 45 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 46 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 47 +</DD> 48 +<DD>SelectFont::<A HREF="#loadfont"><B>loadfont</B></A> 49 +</DD> 50 +</DL> 51 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 52 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 53 +<P> 54 + 55 +SelectFont provides a simple way to choose font. It can be displayed 56 +as a dialog box or as a toolbar. 57 +<BR>Textual items in Dialog box uses <B>-name</B> options so they 58 +can be translated to any language. Symbolic name used are 59 +<B>ok</B>, <B>cancel</B>, <B>font</B>, <B>size</B>, <B>style</B>, 60 +<B>bold</B>, <B>italic</B>, <B>underline</B> and <B>overstrike</B>. 61 + 62 +</P> 63 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 64 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 65 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT> 66 +<DD> 67 + 68 +Specifies a command to call when user select a new font when SelectFont <B>type</B> 69 +option is <I>toolbar</I>. 70 + 71 +</DD> 72 +</DL> 73 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-initialcolor"><B>-initialcolor</B></A></DT> 74 +<DD> 75 + 76 +If specified, add an additional button that lets the user pick a 77 +color. This option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>. 78 +</DD> 79 +</DL> 80 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-nosizes"><B>-nosizes</B></A></DT> 81 +<DD> 82 + 83 +If true, don't show the listbox containing valid font sizes. This 84 +option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>. 85 +</DD> 86 +</DL> 87 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT> 88 +<DD> 89 + 90 +Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in 91 +root window. 92 +</DD> 93 +</DL> 94 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-sampletext"><B>-sampletext</B></A></DT> 95 +<DD> 96 + 97 +Specifies the text displayed in the preview area. 98 + 99 +</DD> 100 +</DL> 101 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT> 102 +<DD> 103 + 104 +Title of the Dialog toplevel. 105 + 106 +</DD> 107 +</DL> 108 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT> 109 +<DD> 110 + 111 +Specifies the type of the SelectFont widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or <B>toolbar</B>. 112 +<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> directly creates the 113 +dialog, displays it and return an empty string if cancel button is 114 +pressed or if dialog is destroyed, and the selected font (and color 115 +if <B>initialcolor</B>) if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog 116 +is destroyed. 117 +<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>toolbar</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> returns the pathname 118 +of the widget created. 119 + 120 +</DD> 121 +</DL> 122 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 123 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 124 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 125 + <I>option</I> 126 +</DT><DD> 127 + 128 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 129 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 130 +</DD></DL> 131 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 132 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 133 +</DT><DD> 134 + 135 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 136 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 137 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 138 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 139 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 140 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 141 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 142 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 143 +Read-only options are not be modified. 144 + 145 +</DD></DL> 146 +<DL><DT><A NAME="loadfont">SelectFont::<B>loadfont</B></A> 147 +</DT><DD> 148 + 149 +Load the font available in the system. 150 + 151 +</DD></DL> 152 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Separator.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>Separator</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>Separator</B> 6 + - 3D separator widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Separator</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR> 18 +</TR> 19 +</TABLE></DD> 20 +</DL> 21 +<DL> 22 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 23 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 24 +<TR> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TR> 26 +</TABLE></DD> 27 +</DL> 28 +<DL> 29 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 30 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 31 + <I>option</I> 32 +</DD> 33 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 34 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 35 +</DD> 36 +</DL> 37 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 38 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 39 +<P> 40 + 41 +Separator is a widget that display an horizontal or vertical 3-D line. 42 + 43 +</P> 44 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 45 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 46 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT> 47 +<DD> 48 + 49 +Specifies the relief of the Separator. Must be <B>groove</B> (the default) or <B>ridge</B>. 50 + 51 +</DD> 52 +</DL> 53 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 54 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 55 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 56 + <I>option</I> 57 +</DT><DD> 58 + 59 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 60 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 61 +</DD></DL> 62 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 63 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 64 +</DT><DD> 65 + 66 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 67 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 68 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 69 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 70 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 71 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 72 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 73 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 74 +Read-only options are not be modified. 75 + 76 +</DD></DL> 77 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/SpinBox.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>SpinBox</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>SpinBox</B> 6 + - SpinBox widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SpinBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> -background or -bg</TD> 17 +<TD> -disabledforeground</TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> -foreground or -fg</TD> 21 +<TD> -repeatdelay</TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> -repeatinterval</TD> 25 +<TD> -state</TD> 26 +</TR> 27 +</TABLE></DD> 28 +</DL> 29 +<DL> 30 +<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT> 31 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> -command</TD> 34 +<TD> -disabledforeground</TD> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> -dragenabled</TD> 38 +<TD> -dragendcmd</TD> 39 +</TR> 40 +<TR> 41 +<TD> -dragevent</TD> 42 +<TD> -draginitcmd</TD> 43 +</TR> 44 +<TR> 45 +<TD> -dragtype</TD> 46 +<TD> -dropcmd</TD> 47 +</TR> 48 +<TR> 49 +<TD> -dropenabled</TD> 50 +<TD> -dropovercmd</TD> 51 +</TR> 52 +<TR> 53 +<TD> -droptypes</TD> 54 +<TD> -editable</TD> 55 +</TR> 56 +<TR> 57 +<TD> -entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD> 58 +<TD> -entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD> 59 +</TR> 60 +<TR> 61 +<TD> -exportselection</TD> 62 +<TD> -font</TD> 63 +</TR> 64 +<TR> 65 +<TD> -helptext</TD> 66 +<TD> -helptype</TD> 67 +</TR> 68 +<TR> 69 +<TD> -helpvar</TD> 70 +<TD> -highlightbackground</TD> 71 +</TR> 72 +<TR> 73 +<TD> -highlightcolor</TD> 74 +<TD> -highlightthickness</TD> 75 +</TR> 76 +<TR> 77 +<TD> -insertbackground</TD> 78 +<TD> -insertborderwidth</TD> 79 +</TR> 80 +<TR> 81 +<TD> -insertofftime</TD> 82 +<TD> -insertontime</TD> 83 +</TR> 84 +<TR> 85 +<TD> -insertwidth</TD> 86 +<TD> -justify</TD> 87 +</TR> 88 +<TR> 89 +<TD> -selectbackground</TD> 90 +<TD> -selectborderwidth</TD> 91 +</TR> 92 +<TR> 93 +<TD> -selectforeground</TD> 94 +<TD> -show</TD> 95 +</TR> 96 +<TR> 97 +<TD> -state</TD> 98 +<TD> -takefocus</TD> 99 +</TR> 100 +<TR> 101 +<TD> -text</TD> 102 +<TD> -textvariable</TD> 103 +</TR> 104 +<TR> 105 +<TD> -width</TD> 106 +<TD> -xscrollcommand</TD> 107 +</TR> 108 +</TABLE></DD> 109 +</DL> 110 +<DL> 111 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 112 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 113 +<TR> 114 +<TD> <A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TR> 115 +<TD> <A HREF="#-range">-range</A></TR> 116 +</TR> 117 +<TR> 118 +<TD> <A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TR> 119 +</TABLE></DD> 120 +</DL> 121 +<DL> 122 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 123 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A> 124 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 125 +</DD> 126 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 127 + <I>option</I> 128 +</DD> 129 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 130 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 131 +</DD> 132 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A> 133 +</DD> 134 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A> 135 + <I>index</I> 136 +</DD> 137 +</DL> 138 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 139 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 140 +<P> 141 + 142 +SpinBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by the <B>values</B> 143 +option or a set of values defined by a mininum, a maximum and an increment. 144 +Notice that <B>range</B> option defines a list of values, so <B>getvalue</B> and 145 +<B>setvalue</B> work with both values and range. 146 + 147 +</P> 148 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 149 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 150 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT> 151 +<DD> 152 + 153 +Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the SpinBox. 154 +</DD> 155 +</DL> 156 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-range"><B>-range</B></A></DT> 157 +<DD> 158 + 159 +Specifies a list of three intergers (or real) describing the minimum, maximum and increment 160 +of the SpinBox. 161 +</DD> 162 +</DL> 163 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT> 164 +<DD> 165 + 166 +Specifies the values accepted by the SpinBox. This option takes precedence over 167 +<B>range</B> option. 168 +</DD> 169 +</DL> 170 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 171 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 172 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A> 173 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 174 +</DT><DD> 175 + 176 +Set bindings on the entry widget. 177 + 178 +</DD></DL> 179 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 180 + <I>option</I> 181 +</DT><DD> 182 + 183 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 184 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 185 +</DD></DL> 186 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 187 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 188 +</DT><DD> 189 + 190 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 191 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 192 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 193 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 194 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 195 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 196 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 197 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 198 +Read-only options are not be modified. 199 + 200 +</DD></DL> 201 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A> 202 +</DT><DD> 203 + 204 +Returns the index of the current text of the SpinBox in the list of values, 205 +or -1 if it doesn't match any value. 206 + 207 +</DD></DL> 208 +<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A> 209 + <I>index</I> 210 +</DT><DD> 211 + 212 +Set the text of the SpinBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values. 213 +<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms: 214 +<P> 215 +<DL COMPACT> 216 +<DT> 217 +<B>last</B> 218 +<DD> 219 +Specifies the last element of the list of values. 220 +<DT><B>first</B> 221 +<DD> 222 +Specifies the first element of the list of values. 223 +<DT> 224 +<B>next</B> 225 +<DD> 226 +Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list 227 +of values. 228 +<DT><B>previous</B> 229 +<DD> 230 +Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list 231 +of values. 232 +<DT> 233 +@<I>number</I> 234 +<DD> 235 +Specifies the integer index in the list of values. 236 +</DL> 237 + 238 +</DD></DL> 239 +<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR> 240 + 241 +When Entry of the SpinBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition 242 +to the default Entry bindings: 243 +<UL> 244 +<LI>Page up set the value of the SpinBox to the last value. 245 +<LI>Page down set the value of the SpinBox to the first value. 246 +<LI>Arrow up set the value of the SpinBox to the next value. 247 +<LI>Arrow down set the value of the SpinBox to the previous value. 248 +</UL> 249 + 250 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/StatusBar.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>StatusBar</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>StatusBar</B> 6 + - status bar widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>StatusBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR> 26 +</TR> 27 +</TABLE></DD> 28 +</DL> 29 +<DL> 30 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 31 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="#-showresize">-showresize</A></TR> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR> 38 +<TD> <A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TR> 39 +</TR> 40 +<TR> 41 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A> 42 +</TR> 43 +</TABLE></DD> 44 +</DL> 45 +<DL> 46 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 47 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 48 + <I>option</I> 49 +</DD> 50 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 51 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 52 +</DD> 53 +</DL> 54 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 55 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 56 + 57 +<P> 58 +StatusBar widget is a simple container widget with a corner resize control, 59 +meant to be placed at the bottom of a toplevel dialog. 60 +</P> 61 + 62 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 63 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 64 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 65 +<DD> 66 +Specifies the desired height for the widget. 67 +</DD> 68 +</DL> 69 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-showresize"><B>-showresize</B></A></DT> 70 +<DD> 71 +Specifies whether to show the corner resize control. 72 +</DD> 73 +</DL> 74 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad</B></A></DT> 75 +<DD> 76 +The spacing to place around the status bar. 77 +</DD> 78 +</DL> 79 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT> 80 +<DD> 81 +The spacing to place around individual status bar items. 82 +</DD> 83 +</DL> 84 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 85 +<DD> 86 +Specifies the desired width for the widget. 87 +</DD> 88 +</DL> 89 + 90 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 91 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 92 +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B> 93 + ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 94 +</DT><DD> 95 +Add a widget to the status bar. Possible options are: 96 +<DL> 97 +<DT><B>-weight</B></DT> 98 +<DD>Weighting of this item for resizing (passed to <B>grid</B>).</DD> 99 +<DT><B>-separator</B></DT> 100 +<DD>Whether to use a separator for this item.</DD> 101 +<DT><B>-sticky</B></DT> 102 +<DD>Passed on to grid.</DD> 103 +<DT><B>-pad</B></DT> 104 +<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD> 105 +</DL> 106 +</DD> 107 +</DL> 108 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 109 + <I>option</I> 110 +</DT><DD> 111 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 112 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 113 +</DD> 114 +</DL> 115 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 116 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 117 +</DT><DD> 118 + 119 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no 120 +<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available 121 +options for <I>pathName</I>. If <I>option</I> is specified with no 122 +<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named 123 +<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of 124 +the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more 125 +<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the 126 +given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command 127 +returns an empty string. 128 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 129 +Read-only options are not be modified. 130 +</DD> 131 +</DL> 132 +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A> 133 +<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...? 134 +</DT><DD> 135 +Delete a widget and associated state from the status bar.</DD> 136 +</DL> 137 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 138 +</DT><DD> 139 +Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be 140 +created.</DD> 141 +</DD> 142 +</DL> 143 +<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A> 144 +</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD> 145 +<DL> 146 + 147 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/TitleFrame.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>TitleFrame</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>TitleFrame</B> 6 + - Frame with a title 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>TitleFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR> 21 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR> 25 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR> 26 +</TR> 27 +</TABLE></DD> 28 +</DL> 29 +<DL> 30 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 31 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 32 +<TR> 33 +<TD> <A HREF="#-baseline">-baseline</A></TR> 34 +<TD> <A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR> 35 +</TR> 36 +<TR> 37 +<TD> <A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR> 38 +</TABLE></DD> 39 +</DL> 40 +<DL> 41 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 42 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 43 + <I>option</I> 44 +</DD> 45 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 46 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 47 +</DD> 48 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A> 49 +</DD> 50 +</DL> 51 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 52 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 53 +<P> 54 + 55 +TitleFrame enables user to create a frame with a title like XmFrame Motif widget. 56 +</P> 57 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 58 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 59 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-baseline"><B>-baseline</B></A></DT> 60 +<DD> 61 + 62 +Specifies the vertical alignment of the title: <B>top</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>bottom</B>. 63 +</DD> 64 +</DL> 65 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT> 66 +<DD> 67 + 68 +Specifies a pad between the border of the frame and the user frame. 69 +The value is in screen units. 70 +</DD> 71 +</DL> 72 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT> 73 +<DD> 74 + 75 +Specifies the horizontal alignment of the title: <B>left</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>right</B>. 76 +</DD> 77 +</DL> 78 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 79 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 80 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 81 + <I>option</I> 82 +</DT><DD> 83 + 84 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 85 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 86 +</DD></DL> 87 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 88 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 89 +</DT><DD> 90 + 91 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified, 92 +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>. 93 +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list 94 +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding 95 +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or 96 +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget 97 +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 98 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 99 +Read-only options are not be modified. 100 + 101 +</DD></DL> 102 +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A> 103 +</DT><DD> 104 + 105 +Return the frame where the user can create any other widget. 106 +</DD></DL> 107 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Tree.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>Tree</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 5 +<DD><B>Tree</B> 6 + - Tree widget 7 +</DD></DL> 8 +<DL> 9 +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT> 10 +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Tree</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD> 11 +</DL> 12 +<DL> 13 +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT> 14 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 15 +<TR> 16 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD> 17 +<TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD> 18 +</TR> 19 +<TR> 20 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD> 21 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD> 22 +</TR> 23 +<TR> 24 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD> 25 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD> 26 +</TR> 27 +<TR> 28 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD> 29 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD> 30 +</TR> 31 +<TR> 32 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD> 33 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD> 34 +</TR> 35 +<TR> 36 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD> 37 + <TD> <A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD> 38 +</TR> 39 +</TABLE></DD> 40 +</DL> 41 +<DL> 42 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT> 43 +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0> 44 +<TR> 45 +<TD> <A HREF="#-closecmd">-closecmd</A></TD> 46 +<TD> <A HREF="#-crossfill">-crossfill</A></TD> 47 +<TR> 48 +<TD> <A HREF="#-crossclosebitmap">-crossclosebitmap</A></TD> 49 +<TD> <A HREF="#-crosscloseimage">-crosscloseimage</A></TD> 50 +</TR> 51 +<TR> 52 +<TD> <A HREF="#-crossopenbitmap">-crossopenbitmap</A></TD> 53 +<TD> <A HREF="#-crossopenimage">-crossopenimage</A></TD> 54 +</TR> 55 +<TR> 56 +<TD> <A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD> 57 +<TD> <A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD> 58 +</TR> 59 +<TR> 60 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD> 61 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD> 62 +</TR> 63 +<TR> 64 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD> 65 +<TD> <A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD> 66 +</TR> 67 +<TR> 68 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD> 69 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD> 70 +</TR> 71 +<TR> 72 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD> 73 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD> 74 +</TR> 75 +<TR> 76 +<TD> <A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD> 77 +<TD> <A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD> 78 +</TR> 79 +<TR> 80 +<TD> <A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD> 81 +<TD> <A HREF="#-linesfill">-linesfill</A></TD> 82 +</TR> 83 +<TR> 84 +<TD> <A HREF="#-linestipple">-linestipple</A></TD> 85 +<TD> <A HREF="#-opencmd">-opencmd</A></TD> 86 +</TR> 87 +<TR> 88 +<TD> <A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD> 89 +<TD> <A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD> 90 +</TR> 91 +<TR> 92 +<TD> <A HREF="#-selectcommand">-selectcommand</A></TD> 93 +<TD> <A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD> 94 +</TR> 95 +<TR> 96 +<TD> <A HREF="#-showlines">-showlines</A></TD> 97 +<TD> <A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD> 98 +</TR> 99 +</TABLE></DD> 100 +</DL> 101 + 102 +<DL> 103 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT> 104 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindArea"><B>bindArea</B></A> 105 + <I>event</I> 106 + <I>script</I> 107 +</DD> 108 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A> 109 + <I>event</I> 110 + <I>script</I> 111 +</DD> 112 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A> 113 + <I>event</I> 114 + <I>script</I> 115 +</DD> 116 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 117 + <I>option</I> 118 +</DD> 119 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#closetree"><B>closetree</B></A> 120 + <I>node</I> 121 +</DD> 122 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 123 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 124 +</DD> 125 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A> 126 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 127 +</DD> 128 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A> 129 + <I>node</I> 130 + <I>text</I> 131 + ?<I>verifycmd</I>? 132 + ?<I>clickres</I>? 133 + ?<I>select</I>? 134 +</DD> 135 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A> 136 + <I>node</I> 137 +</DD> 138 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#find"><B>find</B></A> 139 + <I>findinfo</I> 140 + ?<I>confine</I>? 141 +</DD> 142 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A> 143 + <I>node</I> 144 +</DD> 145 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A> 146 + <I>index</I> 147 + <I>parent</I> 148 + <I>node</I> 149 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 150 +</DD> 151 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A> 152 + <I>node</I> 153 + <I>option</I> 154 +</DD> 155 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A> 156 + <I>node</I> 157 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 158 +</DD> 159 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#line"><B>line</B></A> 160 + <I>node</I> 161 +</DD> 162 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A> 163 + <I>parent</I> 164 + <I>node</I> 165 + <I>index</I> 166 +</DD> 167 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#nodes"><B>nodes</B></A> 168 + <I>node</I> 169 + ?<I>first</I>? 170 + ?<I>last</I>? 171 +</DD> 172 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#opentree"><B>opentree</B></A> 173 + <I>node</I> 174 +</DD> 175 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#parent"><B>parent</B></A> 176 + <I>node</I> 177 +</DD> 178 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A> 179 + <I>node</I> 180 + <I>neworder</I> 181 +</DD> 182 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A> 183 + <I>node</I> 184 +</DD> 185 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A> 186 + <I>cmd</I> 187 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 188 +</DD> 189 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#toggle"><B>toggle</B></A> 190 + <I>node</I> 191 +</DD> 192 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#visible"><B>visible</B></A> 193 + <I>node</I> 194 +</DD> 195 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A> 196 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 197 +</DD> 198 +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A> 199 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 200 +</DD> 201 +</DL> 202 +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR> 203 +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR> 204 +<P> 205 + 206 +<B>Tree</B> widget uses canvas to display a hierarchical list of items (called nodes). 207 +Each node is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional 208 +image or window. Each node can have a list of subnodes, which can be collapsed or expanded. 209 +Each node is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the 210 +<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height. 211 +A node is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the 212 +<B>insert</B> command). The node named <I>root</I> is the root of 213 +the tree and is not drawn. 214 +The tree structure is directly maintained by the widget. 215 + 216 +</P> 217 +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 218 +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR> 219 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-closecmd"><B>-closecmd</B></A></DT> 220 +<DD> 221 + 222 +Specifies a command to be called when user close a node. The 223 +closed node is appended to the command. 224 + 225 +</DD> 226 +</DL> 227 + 228 +<DL> 229 + <DT><A NAME="-crossfill"><B>-crossfill</B></A></DT> 230 + <DD> 231 + Specifies a foreground color for the cross bitmap. 232 + </DD> 233 +</DL> 234 + 235 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossclosebitmap"><B>-crossclosebitmap</B></A></DT> 236 +<DD> 237 + Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross 238 + when a node is closed. 239 +</DD> 240 +</DL> 241 + 242 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-crosscloseimage"><B>-crosscloseimage</B></A></DT> 243 +<DD> 244 + Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross 245 + when a node is closed. Overrides the -crossclosebitmap option. 246 +</DD> 247 +</DL> 248 + 249 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenbitmap"><B>-crossopenbitmap</B></A></DT> 250 +<DD> 251 + Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross 252 + when a node is open. 253 +</DD> 254 +</DL> 255 + 256 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenimage"><B>-crossopenimage</B></A></DT> 257 +<DD> 258 + Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross 259 + when a node is open. Overrides the -crossopenbitmap option. 260 +</DD> 261 +</DL> 262 + 263 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT> 264 +<DD> 265 + 266 +Specifies horizontal indentation between a node and its children. 267 + 268 +</DD> 269 +</DL> 270 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT> 271 +<DD> 272 + 273 +Specifies vertical size of the nodes. 274 + 275 +</DD> 276 +</DL> 277 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT> 278 +<DD> 279 +A boolean specifying if drag is enabled. 280 +</DD> 281 +</DL> 282 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT> 283 +<DD> 284 + 285 +Specifies a command to be called when drag ended. 286 +<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the 287 +option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 288 + 289 +</DD> 290 +</DL> 291 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT> 292 +<DD> 293 + 294 +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag. 295 +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>. 296 + 297 +</DD> 298 +</DL> 299 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT> 300 +<DD> 301 + 302 +Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag 303 +if no node is designated. In other cases: 304 +<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns: 305 +<UL> 306 +<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TREE_NODE</I> if empty as the data type, 307 +<LI><I>{copy move link}</I> as the operations, 308 +<LI>the node identifier as the data. 309 +</UL> 310 +If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments: 311 +<UL> 312 +<LI>the pathname of the tree, 313 +<LI>the identifier of the dragged node, 314 +<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data. 315 +</UL> 316 +and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in 317 +<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 318 + 319 +</DD> 320 +</DL> 321 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT> 322 +<DD> 323 + 324 +Specifies an alternate type of dragged object. 325 + 326 +</DD> 327 +</DL> 328 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT> 329 +<DD> 330 + 331 +Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling 332 +and extract node and position. 333 +<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments: 334 +<UL> 335 +<LI>the pathname of the tree, 336 +<LI>the pathname of the drag source, 337 +<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be: 338 +<UL> 339 +<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>, 340 +<LI><I>{</I><B>node</B> <I>node}</I> or 341 +<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>node index}</I>. 342 +</UL> 343 +<LI>the current operation, 344 +<LI>the data type, 345 +<LI>the data. 346 +</UL> 347 + 348 + 349 +</DD> 350 +</DL> 351 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT> 352 +<DD> 353 +A boolean specifying if drop is enabled. 354 +</DD> 355 +</DL> 356 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT> 357 +<DD> 358 + 359 +Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling 360 +and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>. 361 +If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments: 362 +<UL> 363 +<LI>the pathname of the tree, 364 +<LI>the pathname of the drag source, 365 +<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are: 366 +<UL> 367 +<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string. 368 +<LI>the targeted node if drag icon points a node and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>n</I>, else empty string. 369 +<LI>a list containing a node and the position within the children of the node where drag 370 +icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>p</I>, else empty string. 371 +<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside a node and between two 372 +nodes. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>node</I>. 373 +</UL> 374 +<LI>the current operation, 375 +<LI>the data type, 376 +<LI>the data. 377 +</UL> 378 +The command must return a list with two elements: 379 +<UL> 380 +<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of 381 +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>, 382 +<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>node</I> or <I>position</I>. 383 +</UL> 384 + 385 +</DD> 386 +</DL> 387 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT> 388 +<DD> 389 + 390 +Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of 391 +<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget, 392 +<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two nodes, 393 +and <B>n</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside nodes. 394 + 395 +</DD> 396 +</DL> 397 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT> 398 +<DD> 399 + 400 +Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation. 401 +See option <B>droptypes</B> of 402 +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>. 403 +for more infromation. 404 + 405 +<BR>Default is <I>TREE_NODE</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>. 406 + 407 +</DD> 408 +</DL> 409 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT> 410 +<DD> 411 + 412 +Specifies the desired height for the tree in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels. 413 + 414 +</DD> 415 +</DL> 416 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-linesfill"><B>-linesfill</B></A></DT> 417 +<DD> 418 + 419 +Specifies a foreground color for the lines between nodes. 420 + 421 +</DD> 422 +</DL> 423 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-linestipple"><B>-linestipple</B></A></DT> 424 +<DD> 425 + 426 +Specifies a stipple bitmap for the lines between nodes. 427 + 428 +</DD> 429 +</DL> 430 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-opencmd"><B>-opencmd</B></A></DT> 431 +<DD> 432 + 433 +Specifies a command to be called when the user opens a node. The name 434 +of the opened node is appended to the command. 435 + 436 +</DD> 437 +</DL> 438 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT> 439 +<DD> 440 + 441 +Specifies distance between image or window and text of the nodes. 442 + 443 +</DD> 444 +</DL> 445 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT> 446 +<DD> 447 + 448 +Specifies wether or not the tree should be redrawn when entering idle. 449 +Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the tree. 450 + 451 +</DD> 452 +</DL> 453 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectcommand"><B>-selectcommand</B></A></DT> 454 +<DD> 455 + 456 +Specifies a command to be called when the selection is changed. The 457 +path of the tree widget and the selected nodes are appended to the 458 +command. 459 + 460 +</DD> 461 +</DL> 462 + 463 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill</B></A></DT> 464 +<DD> 465 + If true, the selection box will be drawn across the entire tree from 466 + left-to-right instead of just around the item text. 467 +</DD> 468 +</DL> 469 + 470 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-showlines"><B>-showlines</B></A></DT> 471 +<DD> 472 + 473 +Specifies whether or not lines should be drawn between nodes. 474 + 475 +</DD> 476 +</DL> 477 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT> 478 +<DD> 479 + 480 +Specifies the desired width for the tree in units of 8 pixels. 481 + 482 +</DD> 483 +</DL> 484 +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR> 485 + 486 +<B><A NAME="nodes">NODE NAMES</A></B><BR> 487 +<p> 488 +Certain special characters in node names are automatically substituted 489 +by the tree during operation. These characters are <b>& | ^ !</b>. 490 +They are all substituted with a <b>_</b> character. This is only to 491 +avoid errors because the characters are special to the tree widget. 492 +</p> 493 + 494 +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR> 495 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindArea"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindArea</B></A> 496 + <I>event</I> 497 + <I>script</I> 498 +</DT><DD> 499 + 500 +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event 501 +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs anywhere within the Tree area. 502 +</DD></DL> 503 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A> 504 + <I>event</I> 505 + <I>script</I> 506 +</DT><DD> 507 + 508 +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event 509 +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a node. 510 +The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>). 511 + 512 +<P> 513 +If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindText</B> is overwritten. 514 +</P> 515 +</DD></DL> 516 +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A> 517 + <I>event</I> 518 + <I>script</I> 519 +</DT><DD> 520 + 521 +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event 522 +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a node. 523 +The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>). 524 + 525 +<P> 526 +If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindImage</B> is overwritten. 527 +</P> 528 +</DD></DL> 529 +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A> 530 + <I>option</I> 531 +</DT><DD> 532 + 533 +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>. 534 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 535 +</DD></DL> 536 +<DL><DT><A NAME="closetree"><I>pathName</I> <B>closetree</B></A> <I>node</I> 537 +?<I>recurse</I>? 538 +</DT><DD> 539 + 540 +This command close all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse 541 +through the tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 0 542 +depending on <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>. 543 + 544 +</DD></DL> 545 +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A> 546 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 547 +</DT><DD> 548 + 549 +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is 550 +specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for 551 +<I>pathName</I>. If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the 552 +command returns a list describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will 553 +be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no 554 +<I>option</I> is specified). If one or more <I>option-value</I> pairs are 555 +specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the 556 +given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. 557 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command. 558 +Read-only options are not be modified. 559 + 560 +</DD></DL> 561 +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A> 562 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 563 +</DT><DD> 564 + 565 +Deletes all nodes (and children of them) in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list 566 +of nodes or a list of list of nodes. 567 +To delete all the tree, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName nodes root]</I>. 568 + 569 +</DD></DL> 570 +<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A> 571 + <I>node</I> 572 + <I>text</I> 573 + ?<I>verifycmd</I>? 574 + ?<I>clickres</I>? 575 + ?<I>select</I>? 576 +</DT><DD> 577 + 578 +Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of a node. This is 579 +possible only if <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open). 580 +<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the 581 +edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text 582 +if edition is accepted. 583 +<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return. 584 +<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area. 585 +If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled. 586 +If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted. 587 +In all other case, the edition continues. 588 +<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with 589 +the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it 590 +and continue edition. 591 +<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1. 592 + 593 +</DD></DL> 594 +<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A> 595 + <I>node</I> 596 +</DT><DD> 597 + 598 +Returns whether or not <I>node</I> exists in the tree. 599 + 600 +</DD></DL> 601 +<DL><DT><A NAME="find"><I>pathName</I> <B>find</B></A> 602 + <I>findinfo</I> 603 + ?<I>confine</I>? 604 +</DT><DD> 605 + 606 +<p> 607 +Returns the node given by the position <I>findinfo</I>. 608 +<I>findinfo</I> can take the form of a pixel position <I>@x,y</I> or 609 +of the line number of a currently visible Tree node. The first line 610 +of the Tree has the value of zero. 611 +</p> 612 + 613 +<p> 614 +If <I>confine</I> is non-empty, then confine <I>findinfo</I> to only 615 +match pixel positions for the area consumed by Tree labels, not just 616 +anywhere on their lines. (<I>confine</I> has no effect if 617 +<I>findinfo</I> is a line number.) 618 +</p> 619 + 620 +</DD></DL> 621 +<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A> 622 + <I>node</I> 623 +</DT><DD> 624 + 625 +Returns the position of <I>node</I> in its parent. 626 + 627 +</DD></DL> 628 +<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A> 629 + <I>index</I> 630 + <I>parent</I> 631 + <I>node</I> 632 + ?<I>option value...</I>? 633 +</DT><DD> 634 + 635 +<p> 636 +Inserts a new node identified by <I>node</I> in the children list of 637 +<I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>. 638 +</p> 639 + 640 +<p> 641 +Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the node name will be replaced by the 642 +number of the item in the order of insertion. The non-printable characters 643 +\1 to \5 are reserved for internal use and should not be present in node 644 +names. 645 +</p> 646 + 647 + 648 +<P> 649 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-anchor"><B>-anchor</B></A></DT> 650 +<DD> 651 + Specifies the anchor of the image or window of the node. Defaults to w. 652 +</DD> 653 +</DL> 654 + 655 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT> 656 +<DD> 657 + 658 +User data associated to the node. 659 + 660 +</DD> 661 +</DL> 662 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT> 663 +<DD> 664 + 665 +Specifies the horizontal indentation of the node. If the value is -1, the 666 +node will be drawn with the deltax for the entire tree. 667 + 668 +</DD> 669 +</DL> 670 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-drawcross"><B>-drawcross</B></A></DT> 671 +<DD> 672 + 673 +Specifies how the cross used to expand or collapse the children of a node 674 +should be drawn. 675 +Must be one of <B>auto</B>, <B>always</B> or <B>never</B>. 676 +<BR>If <B>auto</B>, the cross is drawn only if the node has children. 677 +If <B>always</B>, the cross is always drawn. 678 +If <B>never</B>, the cross is never drawn. 679 +To maintain compatibility with older versions of this widget, 680 +<B>allways</B> is a deprecated synonym to <B>always</B>. 681 + 682 +</DD> 683 +</DL> 684 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT> 685 +<DD> 686 + 687 +Specifies the foreground color of the label of the node. 688 + 689 +</DD> 690 +</DL> 691 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT> 692 +<DD> 693 + 694 +Specifies a font for the label of the node. 695 + 696 +</DD> 697 +</DL> 698 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpcmd"><B>-helpcmd</B></A></DT> 699 +<DD> 700 + 701 +If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help text to display. 702 +The command must return a string to display. 703 +If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed. 704 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 705 +</DD> 706 +</DL> 707 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT> 708 +<DD> 709 + 710 +Text for dynamic help. 711 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 712 +</DD> 713 +</DL> 714 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT> 715 +<DD> 716 +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>. 717 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 718 +</DD> 719 +</DL> 720 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT> 721 +<DD> 722 +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>. 723 +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>. 724 +</DD> 725 +</DL> 726 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT> 727 +<DD> 728 + 729 +Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the node. 730 +<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>. 731 +</DD> 732 +</DL> 733 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-open"><B>-open</B></A></DT> 734 +<DD> 735 + 736 +Specifies wether or not the children of the node should be drawn. 737 + 738 +</DD> 739 +</DL> 740 +<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT> 741 +<DD> 742 + 743 +Specifies the distance between image or window and the text of the node. If 744 +the value is -1, the node will be drawn with the padx for the entire tree. 745 + 746 +</DD> 747 +</DL> 748 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-selectable"><B>-selectable</B></A></DT> 749 +<DD> 750 + 751 +Specifies if the node can be selected or not. 752 + 753 +</DD> 754 +</DL> 755 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT> 756 +<DD> 757 + 758 +Specifies the label of the node. 759 + 760 +</DD> 761 +</DL> 762 +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT> 763 +<DD> 764 + 765 +Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the node. 766 +<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>. 767 +</DD> 768 +</DL> 769 +</DD></DL> 770 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A> 771 + <I>node</I> 772 + <I>option</I> 773 +</DT><DD> 774 + 775 +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item. 776 +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command. 777 + 778 +</DD></DL> 779 +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A> 780 + <I>node</I> 781 + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...? 782 +</DT><DD> 783 + 784 +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the 785 +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for 786 +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 787 +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated 788 +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified, 789 +returns a list describing the current options for the item. 790 +Read-only options are not be modified. 791 + 792 +</DD></DL> 793 +<DL><DT><A NAME="line"><I>pathName</I> <B>line</B></A> 794 + <I>node</I> 795 +</DT><DD> 796 + 797 +<p> 798 +Returns the line number where <I>node</I> was drawn. If the node is 799 +not visible then return -1. The first line of the tree has the value 800 +of 0. 801 +</p> 802 + 803 +</DD></DL> 804 +<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A> 805 + <I>parent</I> 806 + <I>node</I> 807 + <I>index</I> 808 +</DT><DD> 809 + 810 +Moves <I>node</I> to the children list of <I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>. 811 +<I>parent</I> can not be a descendant of <I>node</I>. 812 + 813 +</DD></DL> 814 +<DL><DT><A NAME="nodes"><I>pathName</I> <B>nodes</B></A> 815 + <I>node</I> 816 + ?<I>first</I>? 817 + ?<I>last</I>? 818 +</DT><DD> 819 + 820 +Returns parts of the children of <I>node</I>, following <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>.<BR> 821 +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all children. 822 +If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the child at index 823 +<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. 824 +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements 825 +are all of the children between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, 826 +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard 827 +forms for indices. 828 + 829 +</DD></DL> 830 +<DL><DT><A NAME="opentree"><I>pathName</I> <B>opentree</B></A> <I>node</I> ?<I>recurse</I>? 831 + 832 +</DT><DD> 833 + 834 +This command open all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse through the 835 +tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 1 depending on value 836 +of <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>. 837 + 838 +</DD></DL> 839 +<DL><DT><A NAME="parent"><I>pathName</I> <B>parent</B></A> 840 + <I>node</I> 841 +</DT><DD> 842 + 843 +Returns the parent of <I>node</I>. 844 + 845 +</DD></DL> 846 +<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A> 847 + <I>node</I> 848 + <I>neworder</I> 849 +</DT><DD> 850 + 851 +Modifies the order of children of <I>node</I> given by <I>neworder</I>. Children of 852 +<I>node</I> that do not appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved. 853 + 854 +</DD></DL> 855 +<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A> 856 + <I>node</I> 857 +</DT><DD> 858 + 859 +Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>node</I> visible. 860 + 861 +</DD></DL> 862 +<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A> 863 + <I>cmd</I> 864 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 865 +</DT><DD> 866 + 867 +Modifies the list of selected nodes following <I>cmd</I>: 868 +<DL> 869 +<DT><B>add</B> 870 +<DD>Adds all nodes in <I>arg</I> to the selection. 871 +<DT><B>clear</B> 872 +<DD>Removes all nodes from the selection. 873 +<DT><B>get</B> 874 +<DD>Returns a list containing the indices of current selected nodes. 875 +<DT><B>includes</B> 876 +<DD>Tests if the specified node is selected. Returns true if the answer is yes, and false else. 877 +<DT><B>range</B> 878 +<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes between the two specified ones. 879 +<DT><B>remove</B> 880 +<DD>Removes all nodes in <I>arg</I> from the selection. 881 +<DT><B>set</B> 882 +<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes in <I>arg</I>. 883 +<DT><B>toggle</B> 884 +<DD>Toggles the selection status of all nodes in <I>arg</I>. 885 +</DL> 886 + 887 +The subcommands <B>add</B>, <B>range</B>, and <B>set</B> silently 888 +ignore nodes which are declared unselectable. See the node option 889 +<a href="#Node-selectable">-selectable</a> to influence this. 890 + 891 +</DD></DL> 892 + 893 +</DD></DL> 894 + 895 +<DL><DT><A NAME="toggle"><I>pathName</I> <B>toggle</B></A> 896 + <I>node</I> 897 +</DT><DD> 898 + Toggle the open/close status of the given <i>node</i>. 899 +</DD></DL> 900 + 901 +<DL><DT><A NAME="visible"><I>pathName</I> <B>visible</B></A> 902 + <I>node</I> 903 +</DT><DD> 904 + 905 +Returns whether or not <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open). 906 + 907 +</DD></DL> 908 +<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A> 909 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 910 +</DT><DD> 911 + 912 +Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>. 913 + 914 +</DD></DL> 915 +<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A> 916 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 917 +</DT><DD> 918 + 919 +Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>. 920 + 921 +</DD></DL> 922 + 923 +<B><A NAME="nodes">BINDINGS</A></B><BR> 924 + 925 +<p> 926 +A <b><<TreeSelect>></b> virtual event is generated any time the 927 +selection in the tree changes. This is the default behavior of an 928 +item in the tree, but it can be overridden with the bindText or 929 +bindImage command. If the button 1 binding is overridden, this event may 930 +not be generated. 931 +</p> 932 + 933 +<p> 934 +The tree has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus. 935 +</p> 936 + 937 +</BODY></HTML>
Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Widget.html.
1 +<HTML> 2 +<HEAD><TITLE>Widget</TITLE></HEAD> 3 +<BODY BGCOLOR=white> 4 +<IMG SRC="constr.gif" WIDTH="40" HEIGHT="40"> Under construction ...<BR> 5 +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT> 6 +<DD><B>Widget</B> 7 + - The Widget base class 8 +</DD></DL> 9 +<DL> 10 +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT> 11 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#addmap"><B>addmap</B></A> 12 + <I>class</I> 13 + <I>subclass</I> 14 + <I>subpath</I> 15 + <I>options</I> 16 +</DD> 17 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#bwinclude"><B>bwinclude</B></A> 18 + <I>class</I> 19 + <I>subclass</I> 20 + <I>subpath</I> 21 + ?<I>arg...</I>? 22 +</DD> 23 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A> 24 + <I>path</I> 25 + <I>option</I> 26 +</DD> 27 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A> 28 + <I>path</I> 29 + <I>options</I> 30 +</DD> 31 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#create"><B>create</B></A> 32 + <I>class</I> 33 + <I>path</I> 34 + ?<I>rename</I>? 35 +</DD> 36 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#declare"><B>declare</B></A> 37 + <I>class</I> 38 + <I>optlist</I> 39 +</DD> 40 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#define"><B>define</B></A> 41 + <I>class</I> 42 + <I>filename</I> 43 + ?<I>class ...</I>? 44 +</DD> 45 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#destroy"><B>destroy</B></A> 46 + <I>path</I> 47 +</DD> 48 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusNext"><B>focusNext</B></A> 49 + <I>w</I> 50 +</DD> 51 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusOK"><B>focusOK</B></A> 52 + <I>w</I> 53 +</DD> 54 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusPrev"><B>focusPrev</B></A> 55 + <I>w</I> 56 +</DD> 57 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#generate-doc"><B>generate-doc</B></A> 58 + <I>dir</I> 59 + <I>widgetlist</I> 60 +</DD> 61 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#generate-widget-doc"><B>generate-widget-doc</B></A> 62 + <I>class</I> 63 + <I>iscmd</I> 64 + <I>file</I> 65 +</DD> 66 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#getoption"><B>getoption</B></A> 67 + <I>path</I> 68 + <I>option</I> 69 +</DD> 70 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#getVariable"><B>getVariable</B></A> 71 + <I>path</I> 72 + <I>varName</I> 73 + <I>?myVarName?</I> 74 +</DD> 75 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#hasChanged"><B>hasChanged</B></A> 76 + <I>path</I> 77 + <I>option</I> 78 + <I>pvalue</I> 79 +</DD> 80 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#init"><B>init</B></A> 81 + <I>class</I> 82 + <I>path</I> 83 + <I>options</I> 84 +</DD> 85 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#setoption"><B>setoption</B></A> 86 + <I>path</I> 87 + <I>option</I> 88 + <I>value</I> 89 +</DD> 90 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#subcget"><B>subcget</B></A> 91 + <I>path</I> 92 + <I>subwidget</I> 93 +</DD> 94 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#syncoptions"><B>syncoptions</B></A> 95 + <I>class</I> 96 + <I>subclass</I> 97 + <I>subpath</I> 98 + <I>options</I> 99 +</DD> 100 +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#tkinclude"><B>tkinclude</B></A> 101 + <I>class</I>